General Catalogue 2009-2010

1/7/09
8:08 PM
Hager Electro Systems Pte Ltd

23 New Industrial Road #01-03/04
Century Industrial Building
Singapore 536209
Tel : + (65) 6383 1030
Fax : + (65) 6383 0230
Email: sales@hager.com.sg
Web: www.hager.com.sg
Hager Engineering (M) Sdn. Bhd

Level 5, Lot 8 Jalan Astaka U8/84
Seksyen U8, Bukit Jelutong
40150 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Malaysia
Tel : + (603) 7859 1935
Fax : + (603)7859 1945
Email: general@hager.com.my
Web: www.hagergroup.com.my
Page 1
General catalogue 2009 - 2010
2009 SEA COVER.qxd
General catalogue
2009-2010
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:00 PM
Page 1
Welcome to the new edition of our general catalogue

The catalogue has been subdivided into four product groups
for quick reference, colour coded as shown :
Blue
1. Consumer units, modular enclosures and
distribution boards
Green
2. Connection devices
Yellow
3. Protection devices
Red
4. Modular automation and control devices
This colour coding provides an immediate visual link between
product and technical information enabling you to rapidly
locate all information relevant to a particular product or
product range.
Please take a few moments to study the following pages of
the catalogue for a better understanding of the scope of
Hager Distribution Systems.
If you need additional advice or assistance, please contact
your nearest Hager authorised distributor.
Alternatively, call the Hager Sales Offices listed at the rear of
the catalogue.
Daniel Hager
Chief Executive Officer of the Hager Group
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 2
The Hager Group

The Hager Group is a leading supplier of solutions and services for electrotechnical installation in
residential and commercial buildings as well as for industrial applications.
The family owned company operates worldwide employing approximately 11,000 people and generated
sales of 1.3 billion Euro.
Our goals
A global company
Making an important contribution

by supplying premises with safe,
economic and comfortable
electric power.
The expansion of the Hager

Group worldwide was not only
limited to creating commercial
agencies, but included the set up
of a global industrial organisation
with full design and production
capabilities to offer the various
markets suitable products.
Our ambition is to offer the

market a complete range of
products and services for homes,
tertiary buildings and industrial
premises.
Established more than 50 years

ago and still an independent
family owned business, Hager is
a major worldwide player in
electrical control and distribution
systems.
Today the Hager Group manufactures at 30 locations in 12

countries. Its sales activities in
other 55 different countries are
supported by over 7,000 salespoints run by the wholesale trading partners.
Obernai - France
Tehalit headquarters in
Heltersberg - Germany
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Our quality standard is

about people
Although Hagers success was
based on the relevance of its
offer and the performance of its
industrial organization, Human
Resources are its basic and
fundamental assets. Hagers
renowned quality for products,
services and sales organisation
was made possible by the use of
advanced equipment and a
Quality Assurance System
registered to ISO 9001. But it
was made possible first and
foremost by the involvement of
the highly qualified men and
women of the Company using
such equipment and implementing such Quality Organisation.
Page 3
Telford - UK
Ensheim - Germany
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 4
Numerical index
Whilst we have made every
effort to ensure the accuracy of
the information in this catalogue,
we reserve the right, without
prior notification, to modify or
improve design or specifications
as necessary. This catalogue is
not priced, please refer to our
current trade price list.
Symbols used in this

catalogue
I : modules
: mm2
IP : Ingress protection
see page T.2
Cat.ref.
52031
52032
52035
52038
52541
52542
52545
52546
: self-extinguishing
(passes the 650C glow
wire test)
Page No.
Cat.ref.
Page No.
Cat.ref.
Page No.
Cat.ref.
Page No.
D37
D37
D37
D37
D37
D37
D37
D37
AE 982B
AE 990B
C21
C21
BR 464N
C17
CN 463B
CN 480B
C20
C20
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
C22
C22
C22
C22
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
BTC
BTC
BTC
BTH
BTH
BTH
C18
C18
C18
C18
C18
C18
CP 440B
CP 463B
CP 480M
C20
C20
C20
CQ
CQ
CQ
CQ
240J
263J
440J
463J
C20
C20
C20
C20
CZ 001
CZ 001
CZ 007
CZ 008
CZN 005
CZN 005
CZN 006
CZN 006
C16
C20
C19
C19
C19
C20
C19
C20
A
AC 916B
AC 966B
AD 104
C21
C21
C22
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
105
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
184
185
187
188
189
190
191
906B
910B
916B
920B
925B
932B
940B
956B
960B
966B
970B
975B
982B
990B
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
106Z
110Z
116Z
120Z
125Z
132Z
140Z
145Z
150Z
956B
960B
966B
970B
975B
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C22
C21
C21
C21
C21
C21
brass terminals
120Z
125Z
132Z
140Z
956B
960B
966B
970B
975B
982B
990B
AZ 002
C21
B
BC 225N
BC 325N
BC 425N
C17
C17
C17
BD 226N
BD 241N
BD 264N
BD 326N
BD 341N
BD 364N
BD 426N
BD 441N
BD 464N
BDC 280E
BDC 380E
BDC 480E
BDH 280E
BDH 380E
BDH 480E
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C18
C18
C18
C18
C18
C18
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
225N
263N
325N
363N
425N
463N
280E
380E
480E
280E
380E
480E
C
C 004F
C 008F
C 012F
A3
A3
A3
CC 216B
CC 225B
C19
C19
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
216B
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
C19
BF 226N
BF 241N
BF 264N
BF 326N
BF 341N
BF 364N
BF 426N
BF 441N
BF 464N
BFC 480E
BFH 480E
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C17
C18
C18
BG 264N
BG 364N
BG 464N
C17
C17
C17
BP 264N
BP 364N
BP 464N
C17
C17
C17
CH 225J
CH 440J
C20
C20
BR 264N
BR 364N
C17
C17
CN 240B
CN 440B
C20
C20
E
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
EC
001
050
051
100
110
111
112
120
121
310
311
312
320
321
322
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
D24
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
002
002
003
003
100
100
101
101
110
110
170
170
171
171
200
201
202
203
700
701
804
805
806
810
811
812
813
825
826
D6
D31
D6
D31
D6
D31
D6
D31
D6
D31
D6
D31
D6
D31
D32
D32
D33
D33
D31
D6
D38
D38
D36
D38
D38
D38
D38
D36
D36
Cat.ref.
Page No.
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
EE
827
828
830
831
840
841
855
856
860
861
870
871
905
910
960
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D36
D30
D30
D30
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
EG
002
003U
004
005
006
010
010
071
071
103E
110
110
170
170
171
172
172
203E
210
270
270
293
293E
403E
403E
493E
493E
D14
D14
D14
D14
D14
D6
D11
D6
D11
D14
D6
D11
D6
D11
D6
D6
D11
D14
D6
D6
D11
D6
D14
D6
D14
D6
D14
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
010
010
011
011
110
110
111
111
171
171
191
191
209
209
210
210
211
211
271
271
710
710
711
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D7
D6
D8
D6
Cat.ref.
Page No.
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
EH
711
712
712
715
715
716
716
770
770
771
771
810
870
D8
D6
D8
D6
D8
D6
D8
D6
D8
D6
D8
D10
D10
EK
EK
EK
EK
EK
081
082
083
186
187
D20
D20
D20
D20
D20
EMN 001
EMN 003
D15
D15
EN 145
EN 146
D4
D4
EP 071
EPN 050
EPN 051
EPN 052
EPN 053
EPN 501
EPN 503
EPN 510
EPN 511
EPN 512
EPN 513
EPN 515
EPN 516
EPN 518
EPN 519
EPN 520
EPN 521
EPN 522
EPN 523
EPN 524
EPN 525
EPN 526
EPN 528
EPN 540
EPN 541
EPN 546
EPN 548
D5
D3
D3
D3
D3
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
EPS 450
D15
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
ER
120
123
124
135
138
139
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
ES
ES
ES
ES
110
110A
210
216
D5
D5
D5
D5
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 5
Numerical index

catalogue
I : modules
: mm2
see page T.2
Cat.ref.
Page No.
Page No.
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
220
220A
224
224A
226
230
230A
236
237
238
239
240
242
252
262
263
320
320A
345
365
420
420A
424
426
430
430A
432
436
440
442
444
446
450
462
463
466
470
480
490
492
496
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
D5
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
100
101
102
103
300
301
302
C37
C37
C38
C38
C37
C37
C38
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
002
002
004
004
011
011
012
012
100
100
102
102
106
106
108
108
D26
D27
D26
D27
D26
D27
D26
D27
D26
D28
D26
D28
D26
D29
D26
D29
Cat.ref.
EZN
EZN
EZN
EZN
EZN
EZN
wire test)
001
002
003
004
005
006
D16
D16
D16
D16
D16
D16
102A
104A
105A
110A
112A
117A
118A
119A
120A
122A
123A
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
130A
152A
154A
155A
160A
162A
167A
168A
169A
170A
172A
173A
174A
175A
176A
177A
178A
180A
201B
204B
208B
209B
213B
216B
221B
229B
254B
259B
263B
266B
271B
279B
302B
327B
352B
354B
368B
402A
404A
407A
408A
412A
413A
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A9
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A11
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
F
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
brass terminals
Cat.ref.
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
415A
416A
417A
419A
41G
450A
472A
473A
474A
475A
476A
477A
479A
480A
481A
483A
500A
501A
502B
502E
503E
507B
512E
520E
522E
531E
532E
670A
672E
672Z
70Z
71Z
712E
713E
714E
715E
80Z
81Z
85Z
863Z
871Z
874A
957A
958A
959A
95Z
960A
961A
962A
96Z
96Z
97Z
980A
981A
98Z
992A
993A
994A
996A
997A
998A
Page No.
Cat.ref.
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A14
A14
A11
A14
A14
A11
A12
A12
A12
A12
A12
A10
A13
A13
A13
A13
A14
A14
A14
A14
A10
A11
A10
A11
A13
A10
A9
A9
A9
A10
A9
A9
A9
A10
A11
A11
A14
A14
A11
A14
A14
A14
A14
A14
A14
GD 110B
A2
GP 102P
GP 102T
GP 104P
GP 104T
GP 106P
GP 106T
GP 108P
GP 108T
GP 110P
GP 110T
GZ 04E
GZ 04N
GZ 07E
GZ 07N
GZ 104S
GZ 106S
GZ 108S
GZ 110S
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
G
GD
GD
GD
GD
102B
104B
106B
108B
A2
A2
A2
A2
Page No.
H
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
HLE
180S
190S
199S
280S
290S
299S
380S
390S
399S
480S
490S
499S
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
HLF
180S
190S
199S
280S
290S
299S
380S
390S
399S
480S
490S
499S
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
C11
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
HMB
180
190
199
280
290
299
380
390
399
480
490
499
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
180
190
199
280
290
299
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
Cat.ref.
Page No.
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMC
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
HMD
380
390
399
480
490
499
180
190
199
280
290
299
380
390
399
480
490
499
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
C12
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
HMK
180
190
199
280
290
299
380
390
399
480
490
499
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
C13
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
HMX
110
116
120
125
132
140
150
163
210
216
220
225
232
240
250
263
310
316
320
325
332
340
350
363
410
416
420
425
432
440
450
463
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
C14
HR 404
HR 410
C23
C23
Cat.ref.
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
HR
421
422
423
440
441
800
805
820
821
822
823
824
830
831
832
841
842
843
844
HZ 021
HZ 023
HZ 036
HZ 046
HZC 201
HZC 202
HZC 203
HZC 204
HZC 205
HZC 206
HZF 201
HZF 202
HZF 203
HZF 204
HZF 205
HZF 206
HZF 207
HZF 301
HZF 302
Page No.
C23
C23
C23
C23
C23
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C24
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
I
ICOS
ICOS
ICOS
ICOS
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
12
18
5
8
13S
18S
26S
36S
39S
52S
54S
72S
90S
A3
A3
A3
A3
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
J
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
302S
303S
306S
310S
312S
316S
402S
403S
406S
410S
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 6
Numerical index

catalogue
I : modules
: mm2
see page T.2
Cat.ref.
Page No.
Page No.
JAB 412S
JAB 416S
JAE 320S
JAE 325S
JAE 420S
JAE 425S
JAG 331S
JAG 340S
JAG 363S
JAG 431S
JAG 440S
JAG 463S
JAH 380S
JAH 480S
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
C36
JE 003
A13
JFB 202S
JFB 203S
JFB 302S
JFB 303S
JFB 402S
JFB 403S
JFD 206S
JFD 306S
JFD 406S
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
JFE 210S
JFE 310S
JFE 410S
JFG 312S
JFG 316S
JFG 320S
JFG 325S
JFG 412S
JFG 416S
JFG 420S
JFG 425S
JFH 331S
JFH 340S
JFH 431S
JFH 440S
JFI 363S
JFI 380S
JFI 463S
JFI 480S
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
C35
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A18
04FCMA
04MCMA
04PA
06FCMA
06MCMA
06PA
08FCMA
08MCMA
08PA
1022SG
1042SG
1044SG
104SG
1064SG
1066SG
106SG
1086SG
1088SG
108SG
10FCMA
Cat.ref.
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
JK
wire test)
10MCMA
110SG
1124SG
112SG
116SG
118SG
124SG
12FCMA
12MCMA
12PA
16FCMA
16MCMA
16PA
18FCMA
18MCMA
2022SE
2042SE
2044SE
204SE
2064SE
2066SE
206SE
2086SE
2088SE
208SE
210SE
2124SE
212SE
2144SE
216SE
218SE
JZA
JZA
JZA
JZA
JZA
JZA
700
701
701
702
702
703
A18
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A16
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A18
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
A17
C36
C35
C36
C35
C36
C35
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
018F
023F
024F
025F
037F
140
142
143
144
145
148
151
156
158
159
160
162
KB
KB
KB
KB
KB
KB
KB
KB
KB
163I
163N
163P
190B
190C
263A
263B
263C
380B
brass terminals
B4
B4
B4
B4
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
Cat.ref.
Page No.
KB 463A
KB 463C
KB 480B
B2
B2
B2
KD 190B
KDN 163A
KDN 163B
KDN 180A
KDN 180B
KDN 263A
KDN 263B
KDN 280A
KDN 280B
KDN 363A
KDN 363B
KDN 380A
KDN 380B
KDN 463A
KDN 463B
KDN 480A
KDN 480B
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
B3
KF
KF
KF
KF
KF
KF
50S
81A
81D
82A
83A
84A
B2
B2
B3
B2
B2
B3
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
KM
04L
07E
07L
07N
08L
10A
10B
10C
10E
10L
10N
11B
11E
11L
11N
13E
13N
17E
17N
25E
25N
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
Cat.ref.
L 158
C25
LB
LB
LB
LB
113
115
116
118
C25
C25
C25
C25
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
163
332
363
563
732
C26
C26
C26
C26
C26
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
601
602
603
604
701
702
703
704
C26
C26
C26
C26
C26
C26
C26
C26
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
026
501
502
503
504
C25
C25
C25
C25
C25
LZ 060
KZ 012
KZ 013
KZ 014
KZ 021
KZ 022
KZ 023A
KZ 024
KZ 060
KZN 021
KZN 023
KZN 024
B5
B5
B5
B2
B2
B2
B2
B5
B3
B3
B3
L
L 153
L 155
L 156
C25
C25
C25
Page No.
D5
M
ML
ML
ML
ML
ML
ML
506J
510J
516J
520J
525J
532J
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
501N
502N
503N
504N
505N
506N
507N
508N
509N
510N
511N
512N
513N
520N
521N
527N
528N
529N
530N
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
C27
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
Cat.ref.
Page No.
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
102A
104A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
202A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
302A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
101E
102E
103E
104E
106E
110E
116E
120E
125E
132E
140E
150E
163E
201E
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
Cat.ref.
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
202E
203E
204E
206E
210E
216E
220E
225E
232E
240E
250E
263E
301E
302E
303E
304E
306E
310E
316E
320E
325E
332E
340E
350E
363E
MZ 201
MZ 202
MZ 203
MZ 204
MZ 205
MZ 206
MZ 901
MZ 911
MZN 120
MZN 121
MZN 130
MZN 131
MZN 175
MZN 175
MZN 175
Page No.
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C16
C16
C16
C16
C16
C16
C15
C15
C7
C7
C15
C15
C16
C19
C33
N
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 7
Numerical index

catalogue
I : modules
: mm2
see page T.2
Cat.ref.
Page No.
Page No.
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
340A
350A
363A
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
450A
463A
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
100A
101A
102A
103A
104A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
200A
201A
202A
203A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
300A
301A
302A
303A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
400A
401A
402A
403A
404A
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
Cat.ref.
brass terminals
wire test)
NC 450A
NC 463A
C4
C4
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
100A
101A
102A
103A
104A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
200A
201A
202A
203A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
300A
301A
302A
303A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
400A
401A
402A
403A
404A
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
450A
463A
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
100A
101A
102A
103A
104A
106A
110A
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
Cat.ref.
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
200A
201A
202A
203A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
300A
301A
302A
303A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
400A
401A
402A
403A
404A
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
450A
463A
Page No.
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
S
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
125S
132S
140S
163S
180S
199S
225S
232S
240S
263S
280S
299S
325S
332S
340S
363S
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
Cat.ref.
Page No.
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
SB
380S
399S
425S
432S
440S
463S
480S
499S
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
C32
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
115
118F
119F
119G
218F
219F
219G
263
319G
419G
463
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
C33
SK
SK
SK
SK
SK
SK
SK
001
600
601
602
603
604
606
D23
D23
D23
D23
D23
D23
D23
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
SM
001
005
015
020
030
050
100
150
151
250
400
401
500
501
600
601
D21
D21
D21
D22
D21
D21
D21
D21
D22
D21
D21
D22
D21
D22
D21
D22
SPM
SPM
SPM
SPM
SPM
SPM
220E
240E
265E
420E
440E
465E
C30
C30
C30
C30
C30
C30
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
015D
015R
040C
040D
040N
040N
040R
065N
065R
140C
140D
165R
208
208S
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C29
C28
C31
C31
Cat.ref.
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
SPN
215D
215R
240R
265R
408S
415D
415R
440D
440R
465R
504
505
Page No.
C29
C29
C29
C28
C31
C29
C29
C29
C29
C28
C31
C31
Cat.ref.
TG 500C
TG 501A
TG 501B
TG 501C
TH 020B
Page No.
D39
D39
D39
D39
D34
U
UC 969
UZ 01V1
UZ 25V1
UZ 25V2
A12
A13
A13
A13
V
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
051
101
151
200
250
300
400
600
D22
D22
D22
D22
D22
D22
D22
D22
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
301
303
305
312
313
314
315
D19
D19
D19
D19
D19
D19
D19
SU
SU
SU
SU
212
213
214
215
D19
D19
D19
D19
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
SVN
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
131
132
311
312
321
322
331
332
341
342
351
352
371
391
411
413
422
432
433
441
452
D18
D18
D18
D18
D18
D18
D18
D18
D18
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
D17
TG 500A
TG 500B
D39
D39
VB 18J
VB 18W
VB 36J
VB 36W
VB 54J
VB 54W
VB 72J
VB 72W
VC 18PM
VC 18TM
VC 36PM
VC 36TM
VC 54PM
VC 54TM
VE 103U
VE 106U
VE 110U
VE 112U
VE 118U
VE 212U
VE 218U
VE 312U
VE 318U
VE 412U
VF 04PM
VF 04TM
VF 08PM
VF 08TM
VF 12PM
VF 12TM
VF 24PM
VF 24TM
VF 36PM
VF 36TM
VP 03Z
VS 04PM
VS 04TM
VS 08PM
VS 08TM
VS 12PM
VS 12TM
VS 24PM
VS 24TM
VS 36PM
VS 36TM
VU 12NSG
VU 24NSG
VU 36NSG
VU 48NSG
VZ 302N
VZ 303
VZ 310
VZ 311
VZ 405N
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A14
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A8
A8
A8
A8
A8
A4
A7
A6
A8
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 8
Summary
Enclosures &
Distribution
boards
Connexion
devices
Protection
Mini Gamma
enclosures
Cosmos
flush mounting
and Icos
enclosures
IU metal
enclosures
page A.2
page A.3
page A.4
Orion Plus
metal IP65
enclosures
IP65 Orion
Plus metal
enclousres
Orion Plus
GRP IP65
enclosures
page A.9
page A.10
page A.11
Insulated
busbars prong
Insulated
busbars - fork
Connection
blocks
page B.2
page B.3
page B.4
MCBs
4.5kA
MCBs
6kA
MCBs
10kA
page C.2
page C.3
page C.4
Remote control
auxiliary and
auto reclosing
remote control
auxiliary
Auxiliaries &
accessories
for MCBs &
RCCBs
RCDs
add-on
blocks 63125A
page C.15
page C.16
page C.17-18
Earth
leakage
relays
HRC fuse
carriers ad
fuses
Motor
starters
Switchfuse
Automation
page C.23-24
page C.25-26
page C.27
2 way/ centre
off changeover
modular
switches
Enclosed fuse
combination
swiches and
switch disconnectors
Control relays
page C.33
page C.34-36
page C.37
Latching relays
Electromechanical,
analogue and
digital time
switches
In-wall timer
Relays, Interface
relays
Contactors
page D.2 - D.5
page D.6-8
Transformers
Bells and
buzzers
Thermostats
page D.9-10
Analogue
voltmeters,
ammeters
Multimeter
pages D.19
page D.20
page D.21
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 9
Vector IP55
Golf
Vega surface
mounting
Volta flush
enclosures
page A.5
page A.6
page A.7
page A.8
Accessories
for Orion Plus
enclosure
Invicta-TP & N
distribution
boards
page A.12-14
page A.15-18
MCBs
15-25kA
MCBs
Type C
SP & N -ML
MCBs
80-125A
10, 15, 30, 50kA
Accessories
for MCBs
page C.6-7
page C.8
page C.9
page C.11-15
2 and 4 pole
residual
current devices
(RCCBs /
ELCBs)
RCCBs
selective
product range
Combined
MCB / RCD
(RCBO)
RCBO
electronic
page C.19
page C.20
page C.21
page C.22
Surge
protective
devices
Monobloc
surge
protective
devices
Surge
protective
devices for
Isolating
switches
Brass
terminals
1 60A
page B.5
MCBs
15kA
Accessories
for MCBs
High Immunity
series
Replacement
cartridges
page C.28-29
- fine protection
- telephone lines
page C.30
page C.31
page C.32
Electronic
switch
clocks
Time lag
switches
Push buttons
... Control
relays
page C.38
Digital time
switches
Delay timers
Indicator
lights
page D.11
page D.12-14
page D.15-16
page D.17-18
Digital
voltmeters,
ammeters
Selector
switches
Kilowatt hours
meters and
hours counter
Dimmers master
dimmers
page D.23
page D.24
page D.26-28
Current
transformers
page D.22
2009_SEA_001-10.qxd
2/18/03
7:01 PM
Page 10
Summary
Automation
10
Dimmer
system:
1/10V pilots
Dimmer
system:
1/10V pilots
Remote
control for
emergency
light blocks
page A.29
page A.30
page A.30
Twilight
switches
Light
sensitive
switch, 2
channel up to
20kLx
Remote
telephone
interface
pages D.31
pages D.32-33
page D.34
Motion
detector
Motion
detector
360 Motion
detector
pages D.36
pages D.37
page D.38
Presence
detector
Smoke
detector
pages D.38
pages D.39
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 11
Enclosures
A.2
Mini Gamma enclosures
A.3
Cosmos and Icos enclosures
A.4
IU metal enclosures
A.5
Vector enclosures - IP55
A.6
Golf enclosures
A.7
Vega enclosures
A.8
Volta flush enclosures
A.9
Orion Plus metal IP65 enclosures
A.10
IP65 Orion Plus metal enclosures
A.11
Orion Plus GRP IP65 enclosures
Enclosures
2009_SEA_A01-18a.qxd
A.12-14 Accessories for Orion Plus enclosures

A.15-18 Invicta - TP & N distribution boards
A.1
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 12

Enclosures
1 row for 2 to 10
Surface mounting enclosures,
rigid bottom with fixed DIN rail
for devices of a maximum
shoulder measurement of 47 mm
Sealable cover.
Delivered without terminals,
marking strips and end cap
cover for class II.
GD 108B
IP 30
IK 05 without door
insulation class : II
Options :
Door lock with key
Plain or transparent door
Terminal block and connection
assemblies
Earth and neutral terminals
IEC 60 695-2-1/0
and 60 695-2-1/1
For technical information

see page T.3
Designation
Cat.
ref.
GD 102B
1 row, 2
l. 55 x h. 160 x p. 75 mm
GD 102B
1 row, 4
l. 110 x h. 180 x p. 75 mm
GD 104B
1 row, 6
l. 148 x h. 180 x p. 75 mm
GD 106B
1 row, 8
l. 182 x h. 180 x p. 75 mm
GD 108B
1 row, 10
l. 218 x h. 180 x p. 75 mm
GD 110B
Designation
Characteristics
Doors
With integrated handle
for :
GD 106B
Ref.
plain
door
transpar.
door
GD 102N
GP 102P
GP 102T
GD 104N
GP 104P
GP 104T
GD 106N
GP 106P
GP 106T
GD 108N
GP 108P
GP 108T
GD 110N
GP 110P
GP 110T
For plain or transparent door
VZ 313
VZ 313
GP 108P
Key lock
N - terminal 4 connections 2x16 + 2x10
GZ 04N
N - terminal 7 connections 3x16 + 4x10
GZ 07N
PE- terminal 4 connections 2x16 + 2x10
GZ 04E
PE- terminal 7 connections 3x16 + 4x10
GZ 07E
Terminal support for GD 104
GZ 104S
GZ 106S
GZ 108S
GZ 110S
GP 110T
A.2
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 13
Cosmos and Icos enclosures

shoulder measurement of 45 mm
flush mounting box and front
cover made out of insulating
material wall sealing brackets to
take up the plumb
IP30
IK 07
Enclosures
Cosmos flush mounting

enclosure with hinged cover
1 row for 4, 8 and 12I
transparent hinged cover,
removable, for devices of
max. 68 mm depth (with cover),
fixed DIN rail for devices of a

see page T.3
Designation
C 004
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
1 row, 4 I
Front plate
w. 130 x h. 140mm
Flush mounting box :
w. 124 x h. 160 x d. 60mm
N : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10
E : 2 x 16 + 2 x 10
C 004F
1 row, 8 I
Front plate
w. 200 x h. 195mm
w. 194 x h. 160 x d. 60mm
N : 3 x 16 + 3 x 10
E : 3 x 16 + 3 x 10
C 008F
1 row, 12 I
Front plate
w. 270 x h. 195mm
w. 264 x h. 160 x d. 60mm
N : 5 x 16 + 5 x 10
E : 5 x 16 + 5 x 10
C 012F
C 012
Designation
Modules
Row
Cat.
ref.
N:` 2 x 10 + 2 x 16
E:` 2 x 10 + 2 x 16
4/5
ICOS 5
N:` 5 x 10 + 4 x 16
E:` 5 x 10 + 4 x 16
6/8
ICOS 8
N:` 1 x 25 + 5 x 10 + 5 x 16
E:` 1 x 25 + 5 x 10 + 5 x 16
10/12
ICOS 12
N:` 1 x 25 + 8 x 10 + 8 x 16
E:` 1 x 25 + 8 x 10 + 8 x 16
16/18
ICOS 18
Icos IP40 surface mounting

insulated enclosures
Comply with IEC 439-3,
BSEN 60439-3
wxhxd
1 row, 5 I
137.5 x 170 x 98
ICOS 12/S
ICOS 8/S
1 row, 8 I
190 x 170 x 98
1 row, 12 I
297 x 210 x 105
1 row, 18 I
404 x 210 x 105

see page T.5
A.3
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 14
IU enclosures
Designation
IU metal enclosure IP41

1.2mm sheet steel, epoxy
powder coating to RAL 9002
wxhxd
1 row, 13 I
355 x 275 x 110
IU 18S
2 rows, 26 I
355 x 380 x 110
3 rows, 39 I
355 x 530 x 110
4 rows, 52 I
355 x 680 x 110
1 row, 18 I
475 x 275 x 110
2 rows, 36 I
475 x 380 x 110
3 row,s 54 I
475 x 530 x 110
4 rows, 72 I
475 x 680 x 110
5 row, 90 I
475 x 830 x 110
Modules
With rectangular knock-out

for trunking
Removable top and bottom plates
Row
Cat.
ref.
Reversible door
N: 13 x 16
E: 13 x 16
13
IU 13S
N: 2 x (13 x 16)
E: 26 x 16
26
IU 26S
N: 3 x (13 x 16)
E: 39 x 16
39
IU 39S
N: 4 x (13 x 16)
E: 2x(26 x 16)
52
IU 52S
N: 18 x 16
E: 18 x 16
18
IU 18S
N: 2 x (18 x 16)
E: 36 x 16
36
IU 36S
N: 3 x (18 x 16)
E: 36 x 16 + 18 x 16
54
IU 54S
N: 4 x (18 x 16)
E: 2 x (36 x 16)
72
IU 72S
N: 5 x (18 x 16)
E: 2 x (36 x 16) + 18 x 16)
90
IU 90S

see page T.5
Blanking clips
50
50
I(8.7mm)
I(17.5mm)
P 031
P 032
To blank out a complete row
10
18
JP 015
P 032 - P 031
JP 015
Key lock
A.4
Supplied with 1 key

Replaces original catch
VZ 303
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 15
Surface mounting enclosures

with transparent doors
1 to 4 rows from 2 to 48 ,
1 to 3 rows from 18 to 54 .
Adjustable DIN rail for shoulder
measurement 47 and 63 mm,
transparent hinged cover (2 to
10 ) or door (12 to 54 ),
lateral knock outs for cable entry
or coupling pieces:
Pg16 for VE110 and VE116
Pg21 for VE112 to VE318.
VE 212U
IK07 3 + 6 + 10
IK08 12 + 18
Insulation class : class II
With premarked knock outs for

bushes or cable glands M20,
M25, M32, M40 and M50;
supplied with a set of cable
bushes
Colour : light grey RAL7035
nominal voltage : Ui 400V~
nominal current : 63A at
230/400V~
IEC 60 695-2-1/0 and
60 695-2-1/1
IP55
For technical information,

see page T.4
Designation
Pack
Qty.
Cat.
ref.
1 row 2 + 1
w. 111 x h. 175 x d. 93 mm
N : 1x25 + 3x16
E : 1x25 + 5x16
VE 103U
1 row, 4 + 2
w. 165 x h. 190 x d. 113 mm
N : 1x25 + 5x16
E : 1x25 + 7x16
VE 106U
1 row, 8 + 2
w. 237 x h. 210 x d. 114 mm
N : 1x25 + 9x16
E : 1x25 + 11x16
VE 110U
1 row, 12
w. 310 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm
N : 1x25 + 10x16
E : 1x25 + 13x16
VE 112U
2 rows, 24
w. 310 x h. 427 x d. 151 mm
N : 1x25 + 16x16
E : 1x25 + 16x16
VE 212U
3 rows, 36
w. 310 x h. 552 x d. 151 mm
N : 1x25 + 19x16
E : 1x25 + 19x16
VE 312U
VE 412U
VE 106U
VE 312U
4 rows, 48
w. 310 x h. 677 x d. 151 mm
N : 2x(1x25 + 19x16 )
E : 2x(1x25 + 19x16 )
1 row, 18
w. 418 x h. 302 x d. 151 mm
N : 1x25 + 16x16
E : 1x25 + 16x16
VE 118U
2 rows, 36
w. 418 x h. 452 x d. 151 mm
N : 1x25 + 19x16
E : 1x25 + 19x16
VE 218U
3 rows, 54
w. 418 x h. 602 x d. 151 mm
N : 2x(1x25 + 19x16 )
E : 2x(1x25 + 19x16 )
VE 318U
VE 218U
A.5
Enclosures
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 16
Golf enclosures
IP41 flush and surface
mounting enclosures
1-3 rows, 4-36 I
Enclosures are of an insulating
material coloured RAL 9016.
fixed DIN rail for devices of a
maximum shoulder measurement of 47mm, distance
between rails 125mm reversible
door - opening 180.
Delivered with
- Blanking clips
Option
- Key lock
These enclosures are delivered
with brass terminal and supports
for neutral and earth connection.
see page T.3
Designation
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Flush enclosures
1 row, 4 I
Dimensions mm :
(width x height x depth)
Surface 180 x 220 x 17
Wall recess 140 x 177 x 73
1 row, 8 I
Dimensions mm :
1 row, 12 I
Dimensions mm :
2 rows, 24 I
Dimensions mm :
3 rows, 36 I
Dimensions mm :
E : 2x16 + 2x10
Opaque
VF 04PM
N : 2x16 + 2x10
Transparent
VF 04TM
E : 4x16 + 4x10
Opaque
VF 08PM
N : 4x16 + 4x10
Transparent
VF 08TM
E : 6x16 + 7x10
Opaque
VF 12PM
N : 6x16 + 7x10
Transparent
VF 12TM
E : 4x16 + 4x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Opaque
VF 24PM
N : 10x16 + 12x10
Transparent
VF 24TM
E : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Opaque
VF 36PM
N : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Transparent
VF 36TM
E : 2x16 + 2x10
Opaque
VS 04PM
N : 2x16 + 2x10
Transparent
VS 04TM
E : 4x16 + 4x10
Opaque
VS 08PM
N : 4x16 + 4x10
Transparent
VS 08TM
E : 6x16 + 7x10
Opaque
VS 12PM
N : 6x16 + 7x10
Transparent
VS 12TM
E : 4x16 + 4x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Opaque
VS 24PM
N : 10x16 + 12x10
Transparent
VS 24TM
E : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Opaque
VS 36PM
N : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10
Transparent
VS 36TM
Surface enclosures
1 row, 4 I
Dimensions mm :
130 x 180 x 86
1 row, 8 I
Dimensions mm :
200 x 180 x 86
1 row, 12 I
Dimensions mm :
275 x 225 x 95
2 rows, 24 I
Dimensions mm :
275 x 350 x 95
3 rows, 36 I
Dimensions mm :
VZ 311
A.6
Key lock
Golf enclosure 12, 24, 36I
VZ 311
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 17
Vega enclosures
Options
- Door lock
- Cable trunking
These enclosures are delivered

with brass terminal and supports
for neutral and earth connection.

see page T.6
Designation
Surface enclosures
1 row 18I
w. 370 x h. 300 x d. 145mm
VB 18W
VB 18J
2 rows 36I
w. 370 x h. 450 x d. 145mm
3 rows 54I
w. 370 x h. 600 x d. 145mm
4 rows 72I
w. 370 x h. 750 x d. 145mm
Pack
qty.
E : 2x(1x25 + 5x16 + 5x10)

N : 2x(1x25 + 5x16 + 5x10)
VB 54J
Key lock
Flush enclosures
1 row 18I
w.430 x h.335 x d.102 mm
VZ 310
2 rows 36I
w.430 x h.485 x d.102 mm
3 rows 54I
w.430 x h.635 x d.102 mm
VC 36TM
Cat.
ref.
21/2
With transparent door
VB 18W
With plain door
VB 18J
VB 36W
With plain door
VB 36J
VB 54W
With plain door
VB 54J
E : 2x(1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10)

N : 2x(1x25 + 7x16 + 9x10)
E : 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10)

N : 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10)
E : 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10) +

1x(1x25+5x16+5x10)
42/2
21/2
21/2
VB 72W
N : 2x(1x25 + 11x16 + 13x10) +

1x(1x25+5x16+5x10)
VB 54W
Enclosures
IP40 surface and flush

mounting enclosures
with transparent or plain doors;
1-4 rows 18-54I.
Enclosures are of an insulating
material coloured white
RAL 9010.
The enclosures feature a removable chassis with DIN rails for
ease of installation.
Top and bottom cable entry
plates are removable and
interchangeable.
The door is also reversible with
an integral flush handle.
Supplied with 2 keys

VB 72J
VZ 310
With plain door
VC 18PM
VC 18TM
With plain door
VC 36PM
VC 36TM
With plain door
VC 54PM
VC 54TM
E : 8x16 + 9x10
N : 8x16 + 9x10
E : 2x(8x16 + 9x10)
N : 2x(8x16 + 9x10)
E : 2x(10x16 + 12x10)
N : 2x(10x16 + 12x10)
A.7
2/20/09
2:14 PM
Page 18

Flush mounting enclosures with
doors
1-4 rows, 12-48 I
Enclosures manufactured from
insulated material.
Frame and door manufactured
from metal.
Reversible door
Delivered with earth bar,

blanking clips and circuit
identification labelling.
Colour white RAL 9010

see page T.9
Designation
VU 12NSG
Pack
qty.
1 row, 12 I
Wall recess
w. 330 x h. 321 x d. 89mm
Outside
w. 348 x h. 357 x d. 9mm
E : 13x10
N : 13x10
2 +1/2
VU 12NSG
2 rows, 24 I
Wall recess
w. 330 x h. 470 x d. 89mm
Outside
w. 348 x h. 506 x d. 9mm
E : 5x16 + 20x10
N : 5x16 + 20x10
4 + 2/2
VU 24NSG
3 rows, 36 I
Wall recess
w. 330 x h. 595 x d. 89mm
Outside
w. 348 x h. 631 x d. 9mm
E : 2x(8x16 + 9x10)
N : 2x(8x16 + 9x10)
6 + 3/2
VU 36NSG
4 rows, 48 I
Wall recess
E : 2x(8x16 + 9x10) + (6x16 + 7x10)

N : 2x(8x16 + 9x10) + (6x16 + 7x10)
1
VU 48NSG
VU 24NSG
w. 330 x h. 720 x d. 89mm

Outside
w. 348 x h. 756 x d. 9mm
VU 36NSG
VZ 302N
A.8
Cat.
ref.
VU 48NSG
8 + 4/2
Key lock
Supplied with 2 keys

VZ 302N
Mounting kit for

partition walls comprising
4 support clamps
4 screws
For mounting flush enclosures

in partition walls
1 Kit
VZ 405N
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 19
Plain door equipped with one

or two locks with triangular
8mm bit centres, located out
of the sealed area.
Enclosures with plain door

Steel colour RAL 7035
IP 65 / door closed
Insulation class : I
according to IEC 60529
1,5mm thick sheet steel for
body and door
Options :
Key lock
Wall fixing brackets
Plain or perforated mounting
plate
Equipment kits for modular
devices
These enclosures feature :

2 removable gland plate for
cable entry on top and
bottom
Earth studs on both body and
door
Door easily removable

see page T.7
FL110A
Designation
Characteristics
Orion Plus metal enclosures
Dimensions :
height x width x depth
FL 110A
No. of
locks
Ref.
plain
door
Ref.
transpar.
door
300 x 250 x 160
FL 102A
FL 152A
350 x 300 x 160
FL 104A
FL 154A
350 x 300 x 200
FL 105A
FL 155A
500 x 300 x 200
FL 110A
FL 160A
500 x 400 x 200
FL 112A
FL 162A
650 x 400 x 200
FL 117A
FL 167A
650 x 400 x 250
FL 118A
FL 168A
650 x 500 x 200
FL 119A
FL 169A
650 x 500 x 200
FL 120A
FL 170A
800 x 500 x 250
FL 122A
FL 172A
800 x 600 x 250
FL 123A
FL 173A
800 x 600 x 300
FL 124A
FL 174A
950 x 600 x 250
FL 125A
FL 175A
950 x 600 x 300
FL 126A
FL 176A
950 x 800 x 250
FL 127A
FL 177A
950 x 800 x 300
FL 128A
FL 178A
1250 x 800 x 300
FL 130A
FL 180A
Plinth
For Enclosure :
height 50 mm
FL 119A 500 x 200
FL 957A
FL 120A 500 x 250
FL 958A
FL 123A 600 x 250
FL 959A
FL 126A 600 x 300
FL 960A
FL 127 800 x 250
FL 961A
FL 128A, FL 130A 800 x 300
FL 962A
FL 958A
A.9
Enclosures
Orion Plus metal IP65 enclosures
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 20
IP65 Orion Plus

metal enclosures
Characteristics
Key lock
Key lock to be mounted

on the triangular lock
FL 96Z
Replace the triangular locks

of origin
1 set of 2 key locks with

male square 8mm, with 1 key
FL 80Z
1 set of 2 locks double-bars

3mm, with 1 key
FL 95Z

Metal
Metallic wall fixing

brackets with screws
set of 4 pieces
FL 85Z
Kit for connection to earth
For metal enclosures
FL 874A
FL 96Z
FL 80Z
FL 95Z
Ref.
Designation
FL 85Z
FL 874A
Vertical connection kit
FL 670A
A.10
FL 670A
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 21
Enclosure with plain door

Made of glass reinforced polyester (GRP)
Colour : RAL 7035
FL 201B : RAL 7032
Body made out of one piece up
to height 800mm
IP 65 / door closed IEC60529
insulation class : II
according to IEC 61140
These enclosures feature :
Plain door equipped with one
or two locks with triangular
8mm centres, located out of
the sealed area, gasket
directly moulded on the door.
FL 216B

see page T.8
Ref.
plain
door
Dimensions in mm : Heights :
height x width x
top and bottom
depth
parts
300 x 250 x 160
FL 201B
350 x 300 x 160
FL 204B
FL 254B
500 x 300 x 200
FL 209B
FL 259B
500 x 400 x 200
FL 213B
FL 263B
650 x 400 x 200
FL 216B
FL 266B
650 x 500 x 250
FL 221B
FL 271B
800 x 600 x 300
FL 229B
FL 279B
1150 x 600 x 300
FL 302B
FL 502B
1200 x 850 x 300
FL 327B
FL 527B
Characteristics
Orion Plus GRP enclosures
* Enclosure with 2 superposed

doors and a plinth height
70mm
FL 201B made of polycarbonate
1450 x 850 x 300 *
550 / 850
FL 352B
1750 x 850 x 300 *
550 / 1150
FL 354B
2050 x 1100 x 300 * 850 / 1150
FL 368B
Locks
Key locks
for enclosures
to be mounted on the
h 800
triangular lock, supplied with
2 keys n 427
for enclosures
h 1150
FL 96Z
1 set of 2 locks with male square 8mm

with 1 key
FL 81Z
1 set of 2 locks double-bars 3mm

with 1 key
FL 97Z
Delivered with fixing screws M6x12 on

enclosure set of 4 pieces
FL 863Z
FL 92Z
Replacement of triangular lock

of origin
FL 81Z
Options :
Key lock
Plain or perforated mounting
plate
Equipment kits for modular
devices
No of
locks
Designation
FL 216B
Studs in the back of the

enclosure for mounting plate
fastening
FL 97Z
Plastic wall fixing brackets
Ref.
tranpar.
door
FL 98Z
FL 863Z
A.11
Enclosures
Orion Plus GRP IP65 enclosures
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 22
Accessories
for Orion Plus enclosure
Designation
Characteristics
Plain mounting plates
For enclosure :
FL201B
FL102A, FL152A
FL104A, FL105A,
FL154A, FL155A,
FL110A, FL209B
FL160A, FL259B
FL112A, FL213B
FL162A, FL263B
FL117A, FL118A,
FL167A, FL168A,
FL119A, FL120A,
FL169A, FL170A,
FL123A, FL124A,
FL173A, FL174A,
FL125A, FL126A
FL175A, FL176A
FL127A, FL128A
FL177A, FL178A
FL130A, FL180A
Steel sheet 2mm thickness,

aluminium zinc
Assembly of the plates :
Fixed directly on the back of
the enclosure
Or on slides allowing the
indepth setting
(fixing with slides FL450A)
FL 408A
Dimensions
LxH
195 x 245
193 x 280
243 x 330
FL 41G
FL 402A
FL 404A
243 x 480
FL 407A
343 x 480
FL 408A
343 x 630
FL 412A
443 x 630
FL 413A
543 x 780
FL 415A
543 x 930
FL 416A
743 x 930
FL 417A
743 x 1230
FL 419A
FL302B, FL502B
493 x 1080
FL 512E
FL327B, FL527-B
693 x 1080
FL 522E
FL352B
693 x 480
(upper plate)
693 x 780
(bottom plate)
693 x 480
(upper plate)
693 x 1080
(bottom plate)
993 x 780
(upper plate)
993 x 1080
(bottom plate)
FL 520E
193 x 280
FL 472A
243 x 330
FL 473A
243 x 480
FL 474A
343 x 480
FL 475A
343 x 630
FL 476A
443 x 630
FL 477A
543 x 780
FL 479A
543 x 930
FL 480A
743 x 930
FL 481A
743 x 1230
FL 483A
FL204B
FL254B
FL216B
FL266B
FL221B
FL271B
FL229B
FL279B
FL 354B
FL 368B
Perforated mounting plate

Steel sheet 2mm thickness
Assembly of the plates :
Fixed directly on the back of
the enclosure
Or on slides allowing the
indepth setting
(fixing with slides FL450A)
FL 475A
Ref.
For enclosure :
FL102A, FL152A
FL201B
FL104A, FL105A,
FL154A, FL155A,
FL110A, FL209B
FL160A, FL259B
FL112A, FL213B
FL162A, FL263B
FL117A, FL118A,
FL167A, FL168A,
FL119A, FL120A,
FL169A, FL170A,
FL123A, FL124A,
FL173A, FL174A,
FL125A, FL126A
FL175A, FL176A
FL127A, FL128A
FL177A, FL178A
FL130A, FL180A
FL204B
FL254B
FL216B
FL266B
FL221B
FL271B
FL229B
FL279B
FL 521E
FL 520E
FL 522E
FL 531E
FL 532E
Adjustment slides
For assembly of the plates on
depth
4 slides delivered with screws
FL 450A
Nut-clips and screw M5

For perforated mounting plate
1 set = 25 nuts
UC 969
FL 450A
UC 969
A.12
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 23
Designation
Characteristics
Cable trunking
Horizontal and vertical
Width x depth
25 x 60 mm
40 x 60 mm
Pack
qty
Ref.
Length. 2 x 2m
FL 70Z
Length. 2 x 2m
FL 71Z
FL 70Z
UZ25V1
Wire guides
To be fixed on the rail with
support UZ 01V1 by simple
rotation
Large wire guide
20
UZ 25V1
Small wire guide
20
UZ 25V2
Supports for fixing
Clip fixing
20
UZ 01V1
20
FL 871Z
For wire guides
UZ25V2
Blanking strip
To blank a row
(e.g. for terminals) on a front
plate for modular devices
(kit is composed of 6 pieces
per4 modules)
Separable by 1/2
Marking strip
For front plates
Includes :
length. 24
- Adhesive transparent
label holders
- Marking labels
12
JE 003
Setting slides
In-depth of mounting plates
For enclosure :
FL 302B, FL 327B, FL 352B,
FL 354B, FL 368B
FL 672E
Painting aerosol can
Colour RAL 7035
length. 4
FL 672E
FL 672Z
For the touch-up of the Orion

Plus enclosures
FZ 672Z
A.13
Enclosures
Accessories
for Orion Plus enclosures
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 24
Accessories
for Orion Plus enclosure
Designation
Characteristics
Ref.
Equipment kits
For modular devices
- On chassis
only FL 980A and FL 981A
FL 981A
For enclosures :
FL 104A, FL 105A, FL 204B
FL 154A, FL 155A, FL 254B
FL 110A, FL 209B
FL 160A, FL 259B
3 rows (36 )
FL 981A
- On vertical rail
Composed of
- 2 vertical rail, DIN rail
(slide length 44 mm)
- Front plates with slit
- A cross-rail authorizing the
assembly of bars on base and
slides
FL 112A, FL 213B
FL 162A, FL 263B
3 rows (48 )
FL 992A
FL 117A, FL 118A, FL 216B

FL 167A, FL 168A, FL266B
4 rows (64 )
FL 993A
FL 119A, FL 120A, FL 221B

FL 169A, FL 170A, FL 271B
4 rows (88 )
FL 994A
FL 123A, FL 124A, FL 229B

FL 173A, FL 174A, FL 279B
5 rows (130 )
FL 996A
FL 125A, FL 126A
FL 175A, FL 176A
6 rows (156 )
FL 997A
FL 127A, FL 128A
FL 177A, FL 178A
6 rows (222 )
FL 998A
Adjustable DIN rails

In depth for terminal blocks
tilting 30
For enclosures :
length :
FL 112A, FL 117A, FL 118A,

FL 213B, FL 216B, FL 162A
FL 167A, FL 168A, FL 263A FL 266B
400 mm
FL 500A
For equipment kits with vertical

rails
FL 119A, FL 120A, FL 221B, FL 169A, 500 mm

FL 170A, FL 271B
FL 501A
600 mm
FL 502E
800 mm
FL 503E
123A,
126A,
173A,
179A,
FL
FL
FL
FL
124A,
129A,
174A,
176A,
FL
FL
FL
FL
125A,
229B,
175A,
279B
FL 127A, FL 128A, FL130A

FL 177A, FL 178A, FL180A
Plain front plates
For equipment kits
For modular devices,
For enclosures :
FL 104A, FL 105A, FL 110A,
FL 154A, FL 155A, FL 160A
FL 204B, FL 254B
300 mm
VP 03Z
Replacement of the front plates

with slits of origin
FL 112A, FL 117A, FL 118A,

FL 162A, FL 167A, FL 168A,
FL 213B, FL 216B, FL 263B, FL 266B
400 mm
FL 712E
Height : 150 mm
FL 119A, FL 120A, FL 221B

FL 169A, FL 170A, FL 271B
500 mm
FL 713E
600 mm
123A, FL 124A, FL 125A,
126A, FL 129A, FL 173A, FL 174A,
175A, FL 179A, FL 176A, FL 279B,
229B
FL 714E
FL 127A, FL 128A, FL130A, FL 177A, 800 mm

FL 178A, FL180A
FL 715E
FL
FL
FL
FL
A.14
FL 980A
Composed of
- Rails DIN (slide length
44 mm) assembled on chassis
and adjustable in depth
(of front plates with slide)
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL 712E
2 rows (24 )
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 25
Description
Three phase and neutral
distribution boards with 4, 6, 8,
10, 12 16 & 18 triple pole
outgoing ways.
Construction
The invicta metal clad range of
three phase and neutral
distribution boards comprise of
a primary distribution board with
16 modules and 10 modules

with 1 MCCB cutouts. This
enables the product to accept a
variety of incoming configurations to offer a comprehensive
range to meet most applications.
removable gland plates also
allows the mounting of multi
service din rail extension boxes
for modular devices.
They all have a fully flush fitted
Publication 60439-3 :
1990 with Amendment 1 and
BSEN 60439-3 : 1991 with
Corrigendum April 1994 and
Amendment 1, clauses 8.2.1,
8.2.3 and 8.2.4
metal door with slamtype

catch. The pan assembly is fully
shrouded and the busbars are of
one piece design, this ensures
that no hot spots can occur as
there are no mechanical joints.
The boards have been designed
and independently ASTA tested
to BSEN 60439-3 IEC
Totally enclosed, busbar system rated at 200A

Colour coded circuit designation
Removable gland plates
(top/bottom)
Outgoing circuit
Fit with SP TP MCB
1 module RCBO
Incoming cable
Incoming devices
- ELR
- Isolator
- MCB
- MCCB
- RCCB
- Switchfuse
Safety shroud
Robust powder coated

sheet steel enclosure
A.15
Enclosures
Invicta - TP&N distribution boards
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 26
Invicta 63 - TP & N distribution board

125A incoming, 63A outgoing
Description:
Three Phase and Neutral
Type B Distribution Boards
are available in 4, 6, 8, 10,
12, 16, 18 or 24 triple pole
outgoing ways. The 125A
version is supplied
complete fixed load with a 9
module din rail opening to
mount up to125A incoming
devices and other hager
modular products.
All boards are delivered with
both Neutral & Earth Bars
and can be extended using
din rail type extension boxes.
All Phase Neutral & Earth

bars are fully tinned.
All boards are delivered with
circuit identification label.
Electrical specification:
Tested and complies to the
relevant parts of BS EN
60439-1 & 3:
Electrical Supply: 415V ~
Maximum Continuous
Rating: 125A
The rating of the board is in
accord with the incoming
device.
Unconditional withstand:
20kA for 0.2s
Outgoing:
SP MCBs
TP MCBs
SP RCBOs (with flying lead)
Mechanical specification:
Protection Category IP 4x
Material 1.2mm CR4 Steel
Powder Coated RAL 9002
Devices incoming:
HDCrange
125A frame size MCCB
No. of
TP Ways
Fixed load 125A with 125A frame size MCCB incoming
4
Cat. Ref.
Surface
JK 104SG
JK 106SG
JK 108SG
10
JK 110SG
12
JK 112SG
16
JK 116SG
18
JK 118SG
24
JK 124SG
Delivered with link kit for HDC range 125A frame size MCCB
Incoming switch must be ordered separately
Depth 110 mm
No. of
TP Ways
Split load 125A with 125A frame size MCCB incoming
2+2
JK108SG
JK108SG
A.16
Cat. Ref.
Surface
JK 1022SG
4+2
JK 1042SG
4+4
JK 1044SG
6+4
JK 1064SG
6+6
JK 1066SG
8+4
JK 1086SG
8+8
JK 1088SG
12 + 4
JK 1124SG
Depth 110 mm
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 27
Invicta - TP&N distribution boards

No. of
TP Ways
Fixed load 200A with frame h250 tc/td MCCB incoming
4
Cat. Ref.
Surface
JK 204SE
JK 206SE
JK 208SE
10
JK 210SE
12
JK 212SE
16
JK 216SE
18
JK 218SE
24
JK 224SE
Depth 110 mm
No. of
TP Ways
Split load 200A with frame h250 tc/td MCCB incoming
2+2
Cat. Ref.
Surface
JK 2022SE
4+2
JK 2042SE
4+4
JK 2044SE
6+4
JK 2064SE
6+6
JK 2066SE
8+4
JK 2086SE
8+8
JK 2088SE
12 + 4
JK 2124SE
14 + 4
JK 2144SE
Depth 110 mm
A.17
Enclosures
2/20/09
2:15 PM
Page 28
Invicta 63 - TP & N distribution board

Designation
Number of TP ways
Pack
Qty.
Cat.
ref.
TP&N DB
- With 16 modules cutout
- For MCB, isolator, rccb and
switch fuse incomer
JK 04FCMA
JK 06FCMA
JK 08FCMA
10
JK 10FCMA
12
JK 12FCMA
16
JK 16FCMA
18
JK 18FCMA
JK 04MCMA
JK 06MCMA
JK 08MCMA
10
JK 10MCMA
12
JK 12MCMA
16
JK 16MCMA
18
JK 18MCMA
JK 04PA
JK 06PA
JK 08PA
12
JK 12PA
16
JK 16PA
JK 16FCMA
TP&N DB
- With 16 modules cutout
- For MCCB incomer
JK 10MCMA
Pan assembly
- Rated at 200A
JK 08PA
(MCB not included)

For technical information, see page T.5
A.18
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 29
Connection devices
B.2 Insulated busbars - prong
B.3 Insulated busbars - fork
B.4 Connection blocks
B.5 Brass terminals I 60A
Connection
2009_SEA_B01-06a.qxd
B.1
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 30
Insulated busbars - prong

Designation
Section In
Width
module
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
1 pole, 1 step
Brown insulation (phase)
10
63A
13
50
KB 163P
Blue insulation (neutral)
10
63A
13
50
KB 163N
Without insulation
10
63A
13
50
KB 163I
Insulated
20
100A
57
10
KB 190B
20
100A
24
10
KB 190C
10
63A
12
10
KB 263A
10
63A
24
10
KB 263C
16
80A
56
10
KB 280B
10
63A
12
10
KB 363A
10
63A
57
20
KB 363B
10
63A
24
10
KB 363C
16
80A
57
10
KB 380B
10
63A
12
10
KB 463A
10
63A
24
10
KB 463C
16
80A
56
10
KB 480B
for cables : 25mm2
10
KF 81A
for cables : 2 x 16mm2
10
KF 82A
Connection from side In 63A
for cables : 25mm2
10
KF 83A
Connection from back In 63A
for cables : 50mm2
10
KF 50S
End cap cover

For single pole busbars KB 063P and KB 063N
1 set
KZ 021
For double pole busbars, 10mm2
1 set
KZ 022
For triple pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2

and double pole busbars 16mm2
1 set
KZ 023A
For four pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2
1 set
KZ 024
KB 163P
KB 163N
2 pole, 1 step
Insulated
KB 263C
3 pole, 1 step
Insulated
KB 363C
4 pole, 1 step
Insulated
KB 463C
KF 81A
KF 82A
Cable connectors
Connection from top In 63A
KF 83A
KZ 021
KZ 023A
B.2
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 31
Insulated busbars - fork

Section In
Width
module
1 pole, 1 step
10
63A
12
100
KDN 163A
10
63A
57
50
KDN 163B
16
80A
12
100
KDN 180A
16
80A
57
50
KDN 180B
20
100A
56
10
KD 190B
10
63A
12
50
KDN 263A
10
63A
56
20
KDN 263B
16
80A
12
50
KDN 280A
16
80A
56
10
KDN 280B
10
63A
12
50
KDN 363A
10
63A
57
20
KDN 363B
16
80A
12
50
KDN 380A
16
80A
57
10
KDN 380B
10
63A
12
25
KDN 463A
10
63A
56
10
KDN 463B
16
80A
12
25
KDN 480A
16
80A
56
10
KDN 480B
KDN 180B
2 pole, 1 step
3 pole, 1 step
KDN 380A
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
4 pole, 1 step
Insulated
KF 84A
Cable connectors
Connection from side In 63A
for cables : 25mm2
10
KF 84A
Connection from top In 63A
for cables : 25mm2
10
KF 81D
For one pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2
1 set
KZN 021
For double or triple pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2
1 set
KZN 023
For four pole busbars, 10 or 16mm2
1 set
KZN 024
KZ 023
End cap cover
B.3
Connection
Designation
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 32
Connection blocks
Application :
Connection blocks 16 to 35 to
connect incoming cables and
continue live feed.
Technical data :
Connections :
Incoming : 2x25 or 2x35
Outgoing : 16 or 25
Mounting : fixing on DIN rail
Connection blocks include :

One insulated support, brass
connection blocks with
removable antishear plates to
enable the incoming cables to
be connected without cutting.
Designation
Characteristics
Width in
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Connection blocks
Connection on each pole
Incoming : 2x25
4 separate outgoing ways : 16
1 pole
2 1/2
20
K 018F
10
K 023F
K 024F
8 1/2
K 025F
2 1/2
10
K 037F
l. 34 x h. 50 x w. 52mm
2 pole
K 018F
Cat.
ref.
l. 64 x h. 50 x w. 52mm
4 pole
l. 121 x h. 50 x w. 62mm
5 pole
l. 150 x h. 50 x w. 62mm
K 023F
Connection blocks
Connection :
Incoming : 2x35
4 separate outgoing ways : 25
B.4
1 pole
l. 37x h. 30 x w. 47mm
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 33
Brass terminals I 60A

Can be clipped directly on the
DIN rail vertical position or with
KZ 060 rail clip horizontal position.
Description :
Insulated support can be fitted
support for neutral/earth/phase
connections
Technical data :
Brass terminals with/without
Earth = green/yellow support
Phase = beige support
Neutral = blue support
Connections :
number + section
Terminals with support

Pack
Neutral
Earth
qty
cat. ref.
cat.ref.
Phases
cat. ref.
Without support
Pack
Cat.
qty.
ref.
2 x 16 + 2 x 10
4 connections
length 30mm
50
KM 04L
10
K 140
4 x 16 + 4 x 10
8 connections
length 30mm
20
KM 08L
3 x 16 + 4 x 10
7 connections
length 49mm
20
KM 07N
KM 07E KM 07L
10
K 142
5 x 16 + 5 x 10
10 connections
length 67mm
20
KM 10A
KM 10B KM 10C
10
K 143
5 x 16 + 6 x 10
11 connections
length 73mm
20
KM 11N
KM 11E KM 11L
10
K 144
2 x 16 (double drive) + 8 x 10
10 connections
length 69mm
20
KM 10N
KM 10E KM 10L
10
K 145
6 x 16 + 7 x 10
13 connections
length 85mm
20
KM 13N
KM 13E
10
K 148
KM 11B
1 x 25 + 5 x 16 + 5 x 10
11 connections
length 85mm
20
KM 11B
10
K 151
KM 25N
1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 8 x 10
17 connections
length 121mm
20
KM 17N
KM 17E
2 supports 2 supports
10
K 156
1 x 25 + 11 x 16 + 13 x 10
25 connections
length 169mm
20
KM 25N
KM 25E
2 supports 2 supports
10
K 158
length 242mm
10
K 159
length 482mm
10
K 160
length 992mm
10
K 162
Blue support for neutral
10
KZ 012
Green/yellow support for earth
10
KZ 013
Beige supports (see below)
10
KZ 014
50
KZ 060
KM 08L
KM 07N
Connection
KM 04L
KM 10E
KM 13N
KM 25N
1 x 25 + 8 x 16 + 29 x 10
K 151
1 x 25 + 16 x 16 + 61 x 10
Long length terminals

(without support)
Fixing on flat bar
12 x 2 with supports
(see below)
1 x 25 + 33 x 16 + 129 x 10
K 151
K 159
Supports for K 140

to K 162 terminals
insulating material
M4 x 8 fixing screws
KZ 012
KZ 060
Rail clip
Mounting on DIN rail
for fixing terminals on
DIN rail not for : KM 04L, KM 08L,
KM 10A, KM 10B, KM 10C,
KM 10N, KM 10E, KM 10L
B.5
2/18/09
8:11 PM
Page 34
2/19/09
11:59 AM
Page 35
Circuit protection devices

C.02-09
C.10-15
C.15
C.16
C.17-18
C.19
C.20
C.21
C.22
C.23-24
C.25
C.26
C.27
C.28-31
C.32
C.33
C.34-36
C.37-39
Miniature circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers 80-125A
Remote control auxiliary and auto reclosing
remote control auxiliary
Auxiliaries and accessories for MCBs & RCCBs
RCD add-on blocks
2 and 4 pole residual current devices (RCCBs/ELCBs)
RCCBs selective product range
Combined MCB/RCD (RCBO)
RCBO electronic
Earth leakage relays
HRC fuse carriers and fuses
L51-L58 HRC fuse carriers & Switchfuse
Motor starters
Surge protection devices (SPD)
Isolating switches
2 way/centre off changeover modular switches
Enclosed fuse combination switches and
Control relays
Protection
2009_SEA_C01-38a.qxd
C.1
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 36
Miniature circuit breakers 4.5kA type C - MY

Description
Protection and control of circuits
against overloads and short circuits in domestic, commercial
and industrial applications.
Technical data
C curve tripping
Current rating : 1-63A
Breaking capacity :
4.5kA IEC898
6kA IEC947-2
10KAIC NEMA AB-1
Reference calibration
Temperature : 30C
Voltage rating : 230/400V
Mechanical endurance :
20 000 operations
Connection capacity :
25 rigid conductor
16 flexible conductor

see page T.15 - T.16
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Single pole MCB
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
101E
102E
103E
104E
106E
110E
116E
120E
125E
132E
140E
150E
163E
Double pole MCB
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
201E
202E
203E
204E
206E
210E
216E
220E
225E
232E
240E
250E
263E
Triple pole MCB
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
MY
301E
302E
303E
304E
306E
310E
316E
320E
325E
332E
340E
350E
363E
MY 232E
C.2
Approval :
KEMA
ST, SNI, LMK
Designation
MY 106E
MY 316E
Will accept accessories, shunt

Trips, auxiliary contact.
see page 12
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 37
Miniature circuit breakers 6kA type B and C - MT MU

Description
against overloads and short
circuits in domestic, commercial
and industrial applications.
Technical data
MTxxxA = type B tripping
MUxxxA = type C tripping
according to IEC898 and
BSEN 60-898
Temperature : 30C
Breaking capacity :
6kA IEC898
10kA IEC 947-2
22KAIC NEMA AB-1
20 000 operations
25 rigid conductor

trips, auxiliary contact.
see page 12
Approval :
KEMA
SNI
LMK

Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Single pole MCB
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
40
50
63
1
1
1
12
12
12
MT 140A
MT 150A
MT 163A
MU 140A
MU 150A
MU 163A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
202A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
2
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
MT
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
302A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
C curve
cat.ref.
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
MU
102A
104A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
Protection
MT 106A
B curve
cat. ref.
Double pole MCB
MT 232A
Triple pole MCB
MT 363A
C.3
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 38
Miniature circuit breakers 10kA type B and C - NB NC ...

Description
circuits in domestic, commercial
and industrial electrical distribution systems.
Technical data
NBxxxA = type B tripping
NCxxxA = type C tripping
according to IEC898 and BSEN
60-898
Breaking capacity :
10kA according to IEC898
15kA according to IEC947-2
NB 110A
Positive contact indication

Red - contacts closed
Green - contacts open
trips, auxiliary contact.
see page 12
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
B curve
cat.ref.
C curve
cat.ref.
Single pole MCB
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
100A
101A
102A
103A
104A
106A
110A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
200A
201A
202A
203A
204A
206A
210A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
300A
301A
302A
303A
304A
306A
310A
316A
320A
325A
332A
340A
350A
363A
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
450A
463A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
400A
401A
402A
403A
404A
406A
410A
416A
420A
425A
432A
440A
450A
463A
NC 110A
NC 210A
Triple pole MCB
NC 310A
Four pole MCB
C.4
Connection capacity
(up to 63A) :
25 rigid conductor
Designation
Double pole MCB
NB 410A
30kAIC according to NEMA AB-1

Temperature : 30C
Curent rating : 0.5 - 63A
20 000 operations
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 39

for commercial and industrial electrical installation systems
These miniature circuit breakers

are used in commercial and
industrial electical distribution
systems.
MCBs ensure the protection
against short circuit and overload current and the control and
isolation of circuits.
The new architecture of terminal
guarantees an excellent grip of
the cables and a good tightening
comfort.
The pull up terminal is a foolproof terminal which allows:
- to avoid a bad insertion of
cables in the product
- to guide the cable in the
terminal
The tripping mechanism is totally
new. with a fast system of closing, the withstand of contacts on
all type of loads is increased.
On the MCB, the state of isolation (according to IEC 947-2) is
clearly indicated by the OFF
mechanical position on the toggle with green colour.
Curve D tripping:
10 to 20 times the rated current:
for installations containing loads
with high inrush currents
(motors, transformers, ...)
Ranges:
NDN curve D 10000 IEC898
15kA IEC947-2 from 0.5 to 63A
NDN range
Voltage rating: 230/400V AC
Busbar connection:
- on the top with prong busbar
- on the bottom, the MCBs are
equipped with bi-connect
terminals which allow
connection with a fork busbar
and a supply cable in the
terminal. The busbar clip-on
mechanically onto the casing
of the MCB.
Insulation voltage (Ui): 630V
Top and bottom removability:

thanks to new Din clips, an
MCB can be added or
removed easily in a row of
products connected together
with a busbar in case of
maintenance or extension
Impulse voltage (Uimp): 6kV

Durability: 20,000 cycles (O-C)
Calibration temperature: 30C
Connection capacity:
- 25 flexible conductor
- 35 rigid conductor
Foolproof terminal design
Terminal & screw shield and

interpole barrier
Tightening torque:
4 Nm nominal
Busbar and connection

accessories
RCD add-on block
Screw head: PZ2 and slot 6mm
Standard 35mm DIN rail
Breaking capacity according to IEC60947-2 for low ratings

NDN
NDN
Voltage(V)
Locking kit to lock the toggle

in the ON or OFF position
IP rating: IP2x terminals

Identification of the electrical
circuits can be easily done on
the front of all MCBs thanks
to a specific window on each
product.
Breaking capacity according to IEC60898 & IEC60947-2
Number of poles
Option:
Auxiliaries:
- allows remote indication of
main contact position
- allows remote tripping of the
associated device
Protection
MCBs rating from 0.5 to 63A

curve D
Breaking
Breaking
Breaking
Breaking
capacity
capacity
capacity
Icn
Icu
Icu
IEC 60898
IEC 947-2
10,000
15kA
0.5 - 2A
IEC 947-2
80kA
1P
230 to 240
400 to 415
3A - 4A
50kA
2P, 3P, 4P
230 to 240
30kA
6A
30kA
400 to 415
10,000
15kA
C.5
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 40

D curve: IEC 60898: 10000 and IEC 60947-2: 15kA
NDNxxxA: D curve
In from 0.5 to 63A

Un: 230V ~ 400V
Will accept accessories
Description
These MCBs ensure
- protection of circuits against
short circuits
- protection of circuits against
overload current
- control
- isolation
Control
With a fast system of closing,
the withstand of contacts on all
type of loads has been
increased.
Connection capacity
35 rigid conductor
foolproof and IP2x terminal
design
Isolation
The state of isolation is clearly
indicated by the OFF mechanical position on the toggle with
the green colour, providing a
Positive Contact Indication.
Complies with:
IEC 60898
IEC 60947-2
Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Single pole MCB
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
100A
101A
102A
103A
104A
106A
110A
113A
116A
120A
125A
132A
140A
150A
163A
Double pole MCB
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
NDN
200A
201A
202A
203A
204A
206A
210A
213A
216A
220A
225A
232A
240A
250A
263A
Triple pole MCB
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
13
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
NDN300A
NDN301A
NDN302A
NDN303A
NDN304A
NDN306A
NDN310A
NDN313A
NDN316A
NDN320A
NDN325A
NDN332A
NDN340A
NDN350A
NDN363A
Suitable for commercial and

industrial electrical distribution
NDN 116A
NDN 232A
NDN 320A
C.6
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
2/19/09
12:00 PM
Page 41

D curve: IEC 60898: 10000 and IEC 60947-2: 15kA
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Four pole MCB
0.5
NDN 400A
NDN 401A
NDN 402A
NDN 403A
NDN 404A
NDN 406A
10
NDN 410A
13
NDN 413A
16
NDN 416A
20
NDN 420A
25
NDN 425A
32
NDN 432A
40
NDN 440A
50
NDN 450A
63
NDN 463A
NDN 463A
Protection
Designation
Accessories for miniature circuit breaker

NDNxxxA and NRNxxx
Designation
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Terminal shield/screw shield

Prevents access to device terminals
this accessory can be sealed on each pole
MZN 120
Inter-pole barrier
Allows a clear isolation between poles
depending on the connection used
1 set of
3 inter-pole
barriers
MZN 121
MZN120
MZN121
C.7
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 42

15 to 25kA type C - NRN
Type C tripping 25kA ( 25A )
20kA (32-40A)
15kA (50-63A)
Tripping curve:
Type C magnetic setting
to IEC 60947-2
Applications:
Commercial and industrial applications.
Current rating:
0.5 to 63A
Single pole MCB
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
15
15
NRN 116
Double pole MCB

1
NRN 232
Triple pole MCB

1
NRN 320
Four pole MCB

1
C.8

Breaking
capacity kA
Accessories
- RCDs add-on blocks
- Auxiliaries
Complies with IEC 60947-2
Designation
NRN 440
Connection capacity
25 rigid conductor
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
100
101
102
103
104
106
110
116
120
125
132
140
150
163
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
15
15
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
200
201
202
203
204
206
210
216
220
225
232
240
250
263
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
15
15
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
300
301
302
303
304
306
310
316
320
325
332
340
350
363
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
15
15
0.5
1
2
3
4
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
NRN
400
401
402
403
404
406
410
416
420
425
432
440
450
463
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 43

Type C SP&N - ML
Description
Protection and control of
circuits against overloads
and short circuits.
Technical data
Type C tripping characteristics
Breaking capacity :
6000A to IEC898
Voltage rating : 230V
Connection capacity
16 rigid cables
10 flexible cables + busbars
Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
SP&N MCB - 6kA
12
ML 506J
SP&N
10
12
ML 510J
16
12
ML 516J
20
12
ML 520J
25
12
ML 525J
32
12
ML 532J
Cat.
ref.
Protection
ML 516J
C.9
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 44

Thermal magnetic circuit
breakers
curves B - C - D
In 80 to 125 A
These circuit breakers are
intended for the protection of the
circuits against overloads and
short circuits in professional
premises (from residential to
commercial and industrial
premises).
The circuit breakers curve B

are particularly recommended
for the circuits with long cable
length and for residential loads
with low in-rush current.
The circuit breakers curve C
are adapted to the protection of
the circuits in professional
premises.
The circuit breakers curve D
are particularly adapted to the
protection of the circuits where
the installations are subject to
high in-rush currents.
HMB curve B 15000

15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HLE curve B 10000

10 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HMC curve C 15000

15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HLF curve C 10000

10 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HMD curve D 15000

15 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HMK curve C
30 kA of 80 - 100 - 125 A :
width 1.5 / pole
HMX curve C
50 kA of 10 - 63 A :
width 1.5 / pole

equipped with reinforced screw
cages.
A label holder is integrated
under the handle to ensure the
location of the product.
The OFF position is clearly
shown by a green indicator
below the handle.
Suitable for isolation (according
to IEC 60947-2) : the isolation of
the circuit breakers is indicated
by a green indicator on the
handle.
Nominal voltage : 230/400 V

Insulation voltage: 500 V
Options :
Auxiliary :
- to visualise the state ON or
OFF of the circuit breaker,
- to ON/OFF remotely the
circuit breaker
Locking mechanism
Terminal covers and phase
separators
RCD add-on blocks
These circuit breakers have quick

closing : fast and simultaneous
closing of the contacts,
independent of the handling
speed.
Disassembly capability :
Bistable DIN-rail latches
(2 positions) upstream and
dowstream facilitate the
assembly or the
disassembling of the circuit
breakers on the DIN-rail.
Terminals with tightening
compensation.
equipped with screw cages
with tightening
compensation, reinforcement
cage, cable holding jaws.
These elements contribute to
an effective cable tightening
over time.
equipped with cable
terminals of type fast on
upstream and downstream to
feed an auxiliary low voltage
circuit (indicating lights,
auxiliary control...)
Max. circuit 6A 6 mm2 maxi.
That increases the life of the

circuit breaker whatever the type
of load.
Lockable handle
MCB can be locked in Off
position by the integrated
locking facility on the handle.
This lock allows to insert a
2.5-3.5mm plastic cable tie
where you can fit a warning
card if necessary and allows
a safer working environment
for all personnel.
RCD Add-on blocks, simple,
quick, adjustable and fixed
1. assembly
2. connection
3. locking
the assembly of the add-on
block is carried out very
quickly and easily. Simple
and fast : it is a Hager
innovation. add-on blocks
125A are available in fixed
version and adjustable
version.
Model
Icc/Curve
Accessories
Fast-on
connection
Tightening
comp. system
Lockable
handle
Front product
labelling
HLE / HLF
10kA / B, C
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
HMB / HMC
HMD
15kA / B, C, D
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
HMK
30kA /C
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
HMX
50kA /C
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
C.10
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 45

HLE, HLF : B - C 10000 - 10 kA
Curves B and C 10000
IEC 60898-1
10 kA
IEC 60947-2
Tripping curves :
B magnetic setting between
3 and 5 In
C magnetic setting between
5 and 10 In
- 35 flexible wire (50 possible
with some cable end-caps),
- 70 rigid wire
KEMA
In conformity with the IEC
60898-1, 947-2 approved
In 80 to 125 A
Use :
Residential, commercial and
industrial premises
see page T.17
Designation
In / A
Width in
17.5 mm
Circuit breakers 1 pole

1 P.P.
80
Ref.
curve B
Ref.
curve C
1.5
HLE 180S
HLF 180S
100
1.5
HLE 190S
HLF 190S
125
1.5
HLE 199S
HLF 199S
80
HLE 280S
HLF 280S
100
HLE 290S
HLF 290S
125
HLE 299S
HLF 299S
80
4.5
HLE 380S
HLF 380S
100
4.5
HLE 390S
HLF 390S
125
4.5
HLE 399S
HLF 399S
80
HLE 480S
HLF 480S
100
HLE 490S
HLF 490S
125
HLE 499S
HL F499S

2 P.P.
HLF 299F

3 P.P.
HLF 399S

4 P.P.
HLF 499S
C.11
Protection
HLF 199S
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 46

HMB, HMC, HMD : B,C,D 15000 -15 kA
Curves B and C 15000
IEC 60898-1
15 kA
IEC 60947-2
In 80 to 125 A
Tripping curves :
B magnetic setting between
3 and 5 In
C magnetic setting between
5 and 10 In
D magnetic setting between
10 and 20 In
Use :
Residential, commercial and
industrial premises
- 35 flexible wire (50 possible
with some cable end-caps)
- 70 rigid wire
KEMA
In conformity with the IEC
60898-1, 947-2 approved

see page T.17
Designation
In / A
Width in
17.5 mm
Ref.
curve B
Ref.
curve C
Ref.
curve D

1 P.P.
80
1.5
HMB 180
HMC 180
HMD 180
100
1.5
HMB 190
HMC 190
HMD 190
125
1.5
HMB 199
HMC 199
HMD 199
80
HMB 280
HMC 280
HMD 280
100
HMB 290
HMC 290
HMD 290
125
HMB 299
HMC 299
HMD 299
80
4.5
HMB 380
HMC 380
HMD 380
100
4.5
HMB 390
HMC 390
HMD 390
125
4.5
HMB 399
HMC 399
HMD 399
80
HMB 480
HMC 480
HMD 480
100
HMB 490
HMC 490
HMD 490
125
HMB 499
HMC 499
HMD 499
HMC 199

2 P.P.
HMC 299

3 P.P.
HMC 399

4 P.P.
HMC 499
C.12
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 47
Miniature circuit breakers HMK: C - 30kA

CurveC
30 kA
Voltage:
230/400V - 50/60Hz
In 80 to 125A
Use:
Commercial and industrial
premises
In conformity with the

IEC 60947-2
Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack.
qty.
80
1.5
HMK 180
100
1.5
HMK 190
125
1.5
HMK 199
80
HMK 280
100
HMK 290
125
HMK 299
80
4.5
HMK 380
100
4.5
HMK 390
125
4.5
HMK 399
80
HMK 480
100
HMK 490
125
HMK 499
Magnetic setting between 5

and 10 In
- 35 flexible wire
- 50 rigid wire
Cat.
ref.
1 P.P.
1
HMK 199
HMK 299

3 P.P.
1
HMK 399

4 P.P.
1
HMK 499
C.13
Protection
2 P.P.
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 48
Miniature circuit breakers HMX: C - 50kA

CurveC
50kA
Voltage:
230/400V - 50/60Hz
In 10 to 63A
Use:
premises

IEC 60497-2
Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack.
qty.
10
1.5
HMX 110
1 P.P.
16
1.5
HMX 116
20
1.5
HMX 120
25
1.5
HMX 125
32
1.5
HMX 132
40
1.5
HMX 140
50
1.5
HMX 150
63
1.5
HMX 163
10
HMX 210
2 P.P.
16
HMX 216
20
HMX 220
25
HMX 225
32
HMX 232
40
HMX 240
50
HMX 250
63
HMX 263
Magnetic setting between 5

and 10 In
- 35 flexible wire
- 50 rigid wire
C curve
cat. ref.
HMX 120
HMX 225
10
4.5
HMX 310
3 P.P.
16
4.5
HMX 316
20
4.5
HMX 320
25
4.5
HMX 325
32
4.5
HMX 332
40
4.5
HMX 340
50
4.5
HMX 350
63
4.5
HMX 363
10
HMX 410
4 P.P.
16
HMX 416
20
HMX 420
25
HMX 425
32
HMX 432
40
HMX 440
50
HMX 450
63
HMX 463
HMX 320
HMX 440
C.14
2/19/09
12:01 PM
Page 49
Accessories for circuit breakers

80 to 125A and HMX
Designation
Characteristics
Rf.
Terminal covers/ screw cap
Allows to cover connection terminals,

screws of circuit breakers.
The screw covers can be sealed.
MZN 130
Phase separator
1 set of 3 phase separators
MZN 131
MZN 130
MZN 131
Remote control auxiliaries MZ901

and MZ911 allow for the associated product (e.g. RCCB):
- to operate by remote control
the closing and opening
contacts of the associated
product (e.g. MCB)
- to indicate its states
- to stop all controls locally or
remotely
- to make locally or remotely a
reset.
The product MZ911 has a further
function which allows an automatic reclosing when tripping of the
associated product.
This product is mainly used when
continuity of service is required.
Product is able to differentiate a
transient and a permament fault.
These auxiliary devices are

designed for installation in isolated buildings, difficult to get to
(e.g. transmission relays, pumping
stations, etc...)
The number of contact openings
on fault current is limnited to 3
(beyond 3, a reset is requred).
They are to be mounted on the

following products :
- MCBs : Please consult us
- RCBOs SP & 3 mod. and
2P 3 mod.
- RCCBs 2P and 4P up to 63A
- RCCBs 2P and 4P up to 80A
and 100A
MZ 901:
3 positions front side selector :
- to operate by remote control
off & on
- locking/ initialization of
auxiliary device
- reset of auxiliary device
MZ 911 = MZ 901:
Front side selector with one
additional position :
- activation of automatic
reclosing and of opening
and closing controls
Operation indicator light
Supply voltage :
Frequency :
4 control inputs operate by a

contact such as push button
or closing swite (ie.: switch,
relay, automation, etc ...)
- opening, closing,
- locking of auxiliary device
- initialization/ reset of
auxiliary device.
2 built-in contacts (5A) indicating:
- closed or opened contacts
of associated product
- out of order or tripping of
associated product
- locking/ initialization of
auxiliary device.
2 positions side selector for
inhibition time set: 3 min
or 30s
230 V
50/60Hz
Product consumption :
- In permanent operation :
7 VA
- In transition :
5 A max for 150 ms
Control voltage :
230V
Consumption of control : 1 mA
Operation number :
10 000

see page T.18
Designation
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack.
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Remote control auxiliary device
MZ 901
Auto reclosing remote control auxiliary
MZ 911
Devices are delivered with 3 handles of different length

(according to the associated product)
MZ 911
C.15
Protection
Remote control auxiliary and auto reclosing

remote control auxiliary
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 50
Auxiliaries and accessories for

MCBs & RCCBs
All auxiliaries are common to
both single and multi-pole circuit
breakers. These auxiliaries are
fitted to the left hand side of
devices.
Fault indication, auxiliaries,
shunt trips, and under-voltage
releases are fitted with a flag
indicator that indicates the automatic/remote tripping of the
device.
MZ 201
MZ 204
MZ 205
Test mode for CZ001, MZ201,

MZ202 : possible to test cabling
of auxiliary circuits operation by
tripping-over contacts manually.
Resetting of contact occurs
simultaneously with MCB/RCCB
resetting.
Description
Width inI
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
cat.
ref.
Auxiliary +
alarm switch
1 module wide for ON/OFF

& trip indication
CZ 001
Auxiliay contacts
1NO + 1NC auxiliary contact
6A - 230V~
3A - 440V~
Allows remote
indication of main contact status.
1/2
MZ 201
Signal contacts
1NO + 1NC signal contact
6A - 230V~
3A - 440V~
Signal contact indicates a fault
condition (e.g. MCB tripped
on overload or short circuit).
flag indicator
red - MCB tripped
1/2
MZ 202
Shunt trip
Allows remote tripping
of the device
230 - 415 Vac

110 - 130 Vdc
MZ 203
24 - 48 Vac
12 - 48 Vdc
MZ 204
MZ 205
MZ 206
MZN175
Under voltage release

Allows MCB to be closed only
when voltage is above 70% of Un.
MCB will automatically trip when
voltage falls by 35% of Un
48 Vdc
Locking kit
For the dolly of the device
supplied without padlock.
C.16
CZ001 must be fitted on the

RCCB before fitting maximum
one additional auxiliary (MZ203
to MZ206).
Up to 4 auxiliaries can be fitted
on MCB.
Designation
230 Vac
MZN 175

see page T.19
This allows locking of the device

dolly in the on/off position.
will accept two padlocks with
hasps of 4.75mm diameter max.
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 51
RCD add-on blocks (63A)

Description
RCD add-on blocks for use with
MCB ranges MY, MT, MU, NB,
NC, ND, NR up to 63A.
Technical data :
High sensitivity :
10-30 mA instant tripping
Medium sensitivity :
100-500 mA instant tripping
300 - 500mA selective (time
delay)
All devices have a test facility

All devices except 10mA and
100mA, are type AC.
10mA and 100mA are type A.
All devices are protected against
nuisance tripping and transient
voltages
Connection capacities :
25 A :
6 flexible cable
10 rigid cable
40, 63 A : 16 flexible cable
25 rigid cable
Nominal voltage :
2 poles 230V
3 and 4 poles : 230/400V
Comply with IEC1009
These devices are designed to

be fitted on the right hand side
of the 2, 3 and 4 poles MCBs.
The combination device then
provides protection against
overload, short circuits and
earth leakage faults.
Designation
Type
Sensitivity In/A
In
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
2 poles add-on blocks
A
AC
AC
AC
A
A
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
10 mA
30 mA
25A
25A
40A
63A
25A
63A
25A
40A
63A
63A
63A
63A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BC 225N
BD 226N
BD 241N
BD 264N
BE 225N
BE 263N
BF 226N
BF 241N
BF 264N
BG 264N
BP 264N
BR 264N
AC
AC
AC
A
A
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
30 mA
25A
40A
63A
25A
63A
25A
40A
63A
63A
63A
63A
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BD 326N
BD 341N
BD 364N
BE 325N
BE 363N
BF 326N
BF 341N
BF 364N
BG 364N
BP 364N
BR 364N
AC
AC
AC
A
A
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
AC
30 mA
25A
40A
63A
25A
63A
25A
40A
63A
63A
63A
63A
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BD 426N
BD 441N
BD 464N
BE 425N
BE 463N
BF 426N
BF 441N
BF 464N
BG 464N
BP 464N
BR 464N
BD 226N
BD 364N
100 mA
300 mA
500 mA
300 mA
500mA
100 mA
300 mA
500 mA
300 mA
500 mA
100mA
300 mA
500 mA
300 mA
500 mA
BD 426N
C.17
Protection

see page T.20
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 52
RCD add-on blocks type AC

, type A
and HI
for circuit breakers HLE, HLF, HMB, HMC, HMD, HMK, HMX
RCD add-on blocks for circuit
Breakers HMB, HMC, HMD,
HLE, HLF, HMK, HMX.
Fixed :
- high sensitivity 30 mA
instantaneous
- average sensitivity 300 mA instantaneous.
Settings :
- sensitivity In 0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A ...
- delay t 0
- 60 -150 ms.
These devices are intended to
be fixed on the right side of the
circuit breakers to form differential circuit breakers from 80 to
125A, two, three or four-pole.
This circuit breaker + block
ensures, in addition to the overload and short circuit protection,
the protection of the installations
against the insulation defects
(300mA and 1A) and the protection of the people against the
direct contacts (30mA) and indirect (300mA).
Adjustable blocks :
The setting is done by actuating
the thumbwheel in front face.
The setting thumbwheels are protected by a transparent sealable
cover.
Dissassembly :
The bistable latch (2 positions)
facilitate the assembly or dissassembly by the bottom of the circuit breaker + block.
These RCD add-on blocks exist
in version AC and in version AHI.
Version AC
:
The add-on blocks are protected
against unexpected tripping caused by the transitory leakage
currents : lightning, capacitive
loading.
BTH 380E
BDC 480E
The differential defect or earth fault

is visualized by the rearmament
handle of the block in low position
(yellow colour).
Test button for differential functioning check.
Tightening compensation cages
These circuits breakers blocs
are equipped with screw cages
with tightening compensation,
reinforcement arch, cable holding jaws. These elements
contribute to an effective tightening over time.
Version A HI :
Type A
:
when the electrical load is likely to
produce fault component dc pulsating current, the protection of the
people must be carried out by differentials of type A.
- 35 flexible connection
(50 possible with some
terminals),
- 70 rigid connection.
Designation
Sensitivity
fixed / adjustable
In
Add-on blocks 2 poles

2 P.P.
BTC 280E
HI (High Immunity) :
The products with reinforced
immunity reduce the unexpected
tripping when they protect equipment generating disturbances
(micro-processing, electronic ballast,...)

3 P.P

4 P.P
Nominal voltage: -15 +10 %

2 poles: 230 V
Three and four-pole: 230/400 V
Test button: 230/400 V.
requirements of the appendix G
of the IEC 61009-1.
requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
In / A
Width in
17.5 mm
Ref.
add-on
blocks AC
Ref.
add-on
blocks A-HI
Fixed
30 mA
125
BDC 280E
BDH 280E
Adjustable
0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
060 - 150
125
BTC 280E
BTH 280E
Fixed
30 mA
125
BDC 380E
BDH 380E
Adjustable
0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
060 - 150
ms
125
BTC 380E
BTH 380E
Fixed
30 mA
125
BDC 480E
BDH 480E
Fixed
300 mA
125
BFC 480E
BFH 480E
Adjustable
0.3 - 0.5 - 1 A
060 - 150
ms
125
BTC 480E
BTH 480E
Association circuit breaker + add-on block 4 poles adjustable
C.18
Assembly and disassembly facilitated by the drawer assembly

system. The terminal cover is
dependent of the add-on block.
It is provided with jeying systems avoiding the omission of
terminal tightening downstream
of the circuit breaker. .
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 53
2 and 4 pole residual current devices (RCCBs/ELCBs)
Technical data
Nominal voltage :
2 pole 110/230V - 50Hz
4 pole 230/400V - 50Hz
specifications : IEC 61008-1
SS97
80-100A rigid 50
flexible 35
Ambient temperature range :
-5 to + 40C
Positive contact indication :
Mechanical indicator, appearing
on the front face of the RCCB,
linked to the contacts shows the
positive opening of all poles,
red = contacts closed
green = contacts open
You also have the possibility to

install the following accessories :
electrical auxiliaries
terminal cover kit
locking kit
* without SS97
Earth fault indicator

Mechanical indicator
appearing on the front face of
the RCCB to differenciate
between tripping and off position
yellow - tripped
16-63A rigid 25
flexible 16
Sensitivity
In
High sensitivity
Nuisance tripping
All the RCCBs are protected
against transient voltages
(lightning, line disturbances) and
transient currents (from high
capacitive circuits).
DC sensitive RCCBs or time
delay devices are available,
please consult us.
Current

Pack
qty.
Cat.ref.
2 poles
Pack
qty.
Cat. ref.
4 poles
10mA
16A
25A
1
1
CC 216B
CC 225B
30mA
16A
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
1
1
1
1
1
1
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
216B
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
1
1
1
1
1
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
425B
440B
463B
480B*
484B*
CD 240B
Medium sensitivity
100mA
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
1
1
1
1
1
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
1
1
1
1
1
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
Low sensitivity
300mA
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
1
1
1
1
1
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
1
1
1
1
1
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
Low sensitivity
500mA
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
1
1
1
1
1
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
225B
240B
263B
280B
284B
1
1
1
1
1
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
425B
440B
463B
480B
484B
Terminal cover kit

(1 set = 2 covers)
for
for
for
for
to
to
to
to
10
10
10
10
CD 440B
Locking kit :
RCCBs
RCCBs
RCCBs
RCCBs
2I16
4I16
2I80
4I80
63A
63A
100A
100A
setsCZN 005
setsCZN 006
setsCZ 007
setsCZ 008
MZN 175
C.19
Protection
Description
To open a circuit automatically in
the case of an earth leakage
fault between phase and earth
and / or neutral greater or equal
to 10, 30, 100, 300 or 500mA;
use in domestic, commercial
and industrial installations.
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 54
RCCBs - Selective product range type S (delay)

The selective Residual Current
Circuit Breakers are available
with 100, 300 mA sensitivity in
2 and 4 pole version.
Technical data
nominal voltage :
2-pole 127-230V
4-pole 230-400V
A selective RCCBs is time

delayed ( min. 300ms at In).
And it is commonly used as a
main breaker to prevent
nuisance tripping due to
transient overvoltages and
provide discrimination with the
downstream standard RCCBs.
Surge current withstand(8/20s):

Standard : 250A
Selective : 3kA
Type AC
Type
In (A)
Mod.
Cat. ref.
100mA
Cat. ref.
300mA
2-pole
Selective
40A
CN 240B
4-pole
Selective
40A
63A
80A
4
4
4
CN 440B
CN 463B
CN 480B
CP 440B
CP 463B
CP 480M
Alarm and auxiliary contact

Auxiliary contact for remote
indication of breaker position,
and alarm contact for remote
fault indication.
5A/230V
CZ 001
CZ 001
Terminal cover kit for RCCBs 2I

for RCCBs 4I
16 to 63A
10 sets
CZN 005
16 to 63A
10 sets
CZN 006
Earth fault indicator :

Breaker tripping due to earth
fault shown by yellow window
Transient protected :
Protected against nuisance
tripping
Standard : IEC 61008-1,
Positive contact indication :

Red : contacts closed
Green : contacts open
CN 240B
(1 set = 2 covers)
CN 463B
RCCBs - HI (High Immunity) series type A

Sensitivity
(mA)
Pole
Current
(A)
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
30mA
25
CH 225J
40
CH 440J
40
CQ 240J
63
CQ 263J
40
CQ 440J
63
CQ 463J
CZ 001
300mA
CH 225J
Auxiliary & fault contacts

CQ 463J
C.20
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 55
Combined MCB/RCD (RCBO)
Specification
IEC 61009-1
Protected against
Transient voltages (lightning, line
disturbances,...) and transient
currents (from high capacitive
circuits)
Technical data :
The units are available with
current ratings of 6A, 10A, 16A,
20A, 25A, 32A and 40A. The
device switches both the phase
and neutral conductors. All
ratings have 10mA, 30mA,
100mA or 300mA earth leakage
protection. The units feature
indicators which show whether
tripping is due to an overcurrent
or earth leakage fault.
Mechanical life :
2 000 operations
6kA for 6-40A
10kA IEC947-2
Type AC
Connection capacity
Rigid conductor 25
Flexible conductor 16
Voltage rating - 127-230V

Current rating - 6-40A.
Designation
Sensitivity
In
In/A
Breaking
capacity
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat. ref.
type B
Cat. ref.
type C
RCBO 1P+N
10mA
16
6kA
AC 916B
AC 966B
30mA
6
10
16
2
2
2
1
1
1
AD 906B
AD 910B
AD 916B
AD 956B
AD 960B
AD 966B
20
25
32
40
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
970B
975B
982B
990B
100mA
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
956B
960B
966B
970B
975B
982B
990B
300mA
6
10
16
20
25
32
40
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
956B
960B
966B
970B
975B
982B
990B
AD 916B
Grey terminal cover
920B
925B
932B
940B
AZ 002
C.21
Protection
Description
Compact protection devices
which provide MCB overcurrent
protection and RCCB earth
leakage protection in a single
unit.
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 56
RCBO electronic
Description
Compact one module protection
devices which combine the
overcurrent functions of an MCB
with the earth fault functions of
an RCD. A range of senstivity
and current ratings are available
for use in commercial and
industrial applications
Technical data
Specification
complies with BSEN61009,
IEC1009
Sensitivity (fixed)
10 - 30 - 100 - 300 mA
Terminal capacities :
1 module type - 16 rigid
10 flexible
Operation temperature :
-25c to +55C
Features
1 module devices provide a
compact solution for installation
in consumer units, Invicta TP+N
distribution boards, and din rail
enclosures. These devices are
1P & solid neutral.
Operating voltage
110 - 230 V AC
Flying neutral lead length
700mm
Sensitivity In
mA
Breaking
capacity
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.ref.
type B
Cat. ref.
type C
10mA
6kA
16A
AC 107
AC 122
30mA
6kA
6A
10A
16A
20A
25A
32A
40A
45A
50A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
100mA
6kA
6A
10A
16A
20A
25A
32A
40A
45A
50A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
106Z
110Z
116Z
120Z
125Z
132Z
140Z
145Z
150Z
300mA
6kA
20A
25A
32A
40A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AF
AF
AF
AF
120Z
125Z
132Z
140Z
30mA
10kA
6A
10A
16A
20A
25A
32A
40A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
AD
184
185
187
188
189
190
191
AD 110
C.22
104
105
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 57

Common characteristics
- positive safety :
the relay trips in the event of a
break in the connection between
relay and torrod.
- Positive reset required after a
fault is detected.
- Test button for simulation of a
fault.
- Protected against nuisance
tripping
- Class A
- EMC 30V/m immunity
- Output : 1 C/O contact 250V~
6A AC1.
- Visual display of fault by red LED.
- Supply voltage 230V~ 20%
50/60Hz
- Supply voltage indication
Features according to the
selected model
- Adjustment of sensitivity and
time delay (sealable).
- Extra positive safety contact
(1C/O 250V AC~ 6A AC1).
- Display of fault current before it
triggers the relay (5% to 75%).
- Extra output contact (250V AC1/6A) to enable remote

indication of fault currents over
50% of In
- Remote test and reset by 3-wire
link.
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Earth leakage
relay
C/O contact
6A~ AC1 250V~
Instant trip
adjustable sensitivity
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 2A/ 3A

C/O contact
6A AC1 250V~
Standard version 1 OF
Adjustable time delay
0/0.1s./0.3s/0.4s./0.5s/1s/3s
These units ensure the protection

of electrical installations and the
protection of persons against
direct and indirect contacts.
This range of products contain a
set of earth leakage relays,
designed on an electronic basis,
which ensure the monitoring of
earth fault currents. When the
fault current rises above the
selected level, the outputs of the
product operate depending on
the relay selected, it can have
either fixed or selectivity
purposes.
The relays are linked with
detection torroids. 14 separate
types are available, circular and
rectangular in section.
HR 404
Torroids
Circular dia. 30, 35, 70, 105, 140,
210mm
rectangular 70x175, 115x305,
150x350mm
Connection capacity
Relay :
Flexible 1 to 2.5
Rigid 1.5 to 4
Relay - torroid link
2 wires, 25m max. + 50m
Twisted wire
Test and remote reset link
3 wires, 200m max.

see page T.12
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
HR 404
HR 410
HR 421
HR 422
HR 423
HR 440
HR 441
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A/ 5A/ 10A
Earth leakage
relay with led optical scale
C/O contact
6A~ AC1 250V~

0/0.1s./0.2s./0.25s/0.3s/0.4s./0.5s
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 2A/ 3A
HR 410
HR421 :
- output contact for
remote indication of
fault current 50% In
- standard or positive
safety output
- external test and reset

0/0.1s./0.2s./0.25s/0.3s/0.4s./0.5s
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A/ 10A

0/0.1s./0.2s./0.25s/0.3s/0.4s./0.5s
0.5A/ 1A/ 3A/ 5A/ 10A/ 20A/ 30A
HR 422
Earth leakage
relay with integrated
torroid 25mm
Instant trip or time delay

0.1s/0.3s/0.5s/0.75s/1s
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A
With integrated
torrod 35mm
HR 440
Instant trip or time delay

0.1s/0.3s/0.5s/0.75s/1s
0.03A/ 0.1A/ 0.3A/ 0.5A/ 1A/ 3A
C.23
Protection
Earth leakage relays with

separate detection torroids
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 58

Detection torroids
Torrods can be associated with
HR4xx range ELRs. They meet all
requirements of electrical distribution.
6 circular section torrods of
30 to 210 mm
3 closed rectangular section
torrods
5 rectangular section torroids
opening for renovation (can be
installed without disconnecting

cables).
Mounting :
- Either directly on cable or strip
iron
- On perforated plate kits in
Orion enclosures.
Characteristics
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Circular section torroid
30mm
Section 7 cm2
HR 800
35mm
Section 7cm2
HR 841
70mm
Section 38cm2
HR 842
105mm
Section 87cm2
HR 843
140mm
Section 154cm2
HR 844
210mm
Section 346cm2
HR 805
70 x 175mm
Section 123cm2
HR 830
115 x 305mm
Section 351cm2
HR 831
150 x 350mm
Section 525cm2
HR 832
20 x 30mm
Section 6cm2
HR 820
50 x 80mm
Section 40cm2
HR 821
80 x 80mm
Section 64cm2
HR 822
90 x 120mm
Section 96cm2
HR 823
90 x 160mm
Section 128cm2
HR 824
Rectangular section torroid
HR 830
Open rectangular torroid
C.24
Maximum torroids/relay length :

- 50 m max with twisted cable
of 1,5
Designation
HR 843
HR 822
Connection of cables :
- Rigid 1,5 to 4
- Flexible 1 to 6

see page T.13
HR 841
HR 820
Installation instruction :
- Put cables or bars in the
centre of the torroid
- The PE conductor must not
pass through the torroid
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 59
BS 1361 HRC fuse carriers and fuses

Description
circuits :
- In domestic installations
- In commercial and light
Industrial electrical distribution
systems
Rigid conductor 16
Technical data :
- Fuse carriers suitable for fuses
which fully comply with the
dimensional, power loss,
fusing factor, discrimination
and time current
characteristics of BS 136.
Complies with BS1361:1971:
Designation
Current
rating (Amps)
Fuse carriers
5A - 240V
White
15A - 240V
BS 1361 HRC
Spare cartridge fuses
(suitable only for L11x carriers)
Colour
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack.
qty.
Cat.
ref.
12
LB 113
Blue
12
LB 115
20A - 240V
Yellow
12
LB 116
30A - 240V
Red
12
LB 118
5A (23 x 6.35 x 4.8mm)
White
50
L 153
15A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm)
Blue
50
L 155
20A (26 x 10.32 x 6.4mm)
Yellow
50
L 156
30A (29 x 12.7 x 8mm)
Red
50
L 158
HRC fuse carriers

Fuse carrier 32 Amps max.
against overloads and
Short-circuit :
- In single or three phase
subcircuits
- Suitable for fuses which
comply with IEC 269
- Rating voltage : 415 V a.c.
250 V d.c.
- Fusing factor : class Q1

- Rated breaking capacities;
80kA at 415 V a.c.
40kA at 250 V d.c.
- Complies with IEC269-2, 2-1
- For spare cartridge fuses
10.3 x 38mm
Designation
Description
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack.
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Fuse carriers
For cylindrical cartridge
fuses 10.3 x 38mm
(supplied without fuse)
1 phase
12
LS 501
1 phase + neutral
LS 502
3 phase
LS 503
3 phase + neutral
LS 504
LS 501
C.25
Protection
- short-circuit rating : 16.5kA

(i.e. no further consideration of
fault levels is necessary)
- colour coded ratings
- connection capacities :
top : cable + busbar
2/19/09
12:02 PM
Page 60
L51 - L58 HRC fuse carriers

Fuse carriers L 51
For spare cartridge fuses
14 x 51mm
50A 690V
Fuse carriers L 58
For cylindrical cartridge fuses
22 x 58mm
125A 690V
35 rigid cable
25 flexible cable
50 rigid cable
35 flexible cable
Designation
Description
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
L51 fuse carrier
1 phase
1 1/2
10
LR 601
2 phases
LR 602
3 phases
4 1/2
LR 603
3 phases + neutral
LR 604
1 phase
LR 701
2 phases
LR 702
3 phases
LR 703
3 phases + neutral
LR 704
Designation
Description
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
32A
1 pole & neutral
1.5
12
LC 732
63A
1 pole
1.5
12
LC 163
63A
1 pole & neutral
LC 563
32A
3 pole
4.5
LC 332
63A
3 pole
4.5
LC 363
Can be padlocked in the off

position
LR 601
L58 fuse carrier
LR 703
Switchfuse
C.26
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 61
Motor starters
Description
To ensure localised control and
protection of single and three
phase motors. All motor starters
have thermal and adjustable
magnetic trip.
Conform to :
IEC 947-1, IEC947-2
Note :
Please consult us for enclosure
selection
Technical data :
- Adjustable thermal relay
- AC3 utilisation category
Current
setting
Auxiliary contacts :
MZ 520N, MZ 527N
Alarm contact :
MZ 527N
Connection capacity
2 conductors
Max size 1 to 4 flexible
1.5 to 6 rigid
Designation
Options :
Undervoltage release :
MZ 528N, MZ 529N

see page T.23
Standard power Rating of 3 phase
motor 50/60Hz (AC3 category)
230V (kW)
400V (kW)
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat. ref.
type B
Motor starters 0.1 - 0.16A
MM 501N
0.16 - 0.24A
0.06
2 1/2
MM 502N
0.24 - 0.4A
0.06
0.09
2 1/2
MM 503N
0.4 - 0.6A
0.09
0.12
2 1/2
MM 504N
0.6 - 1.0A
0.12
0.25
2 1/2
MM 505N
1.0 - 1.6A
0.25
0.55
2 1/2
MM 506N
1.6 - 2.4A
0.55
0.8
2 1/2
MM 507N
2.4 - 4.0A
0.8
1.5
2 1/2
MM 508N
4.0 - 6.0A
1.5
2.5
2 1/2
MM 509N
6.0 - 10A
2.5
4.0
2 1/2
MM 510N
10 - 16A
4.0
7.5
2 1/2
MM 511N
16 - 20A
5.5
9.0
2 1/2
MM 512N
20 - 25A
5.5
12.5
2 1/2
MM 513N
Auxiliary contacts
(act as an indicating
control device to monitor
the ON or OFF position)
1C + 1O
2A - 400V~
3.5A - 230V~
1/2
MZ 520N
Alarm contacts
(mounted inside the
motor starter)
1C
2A - 400V~
3,5A - 230V~
MZ 527N
230V~ 50Hz
MZ 528N
400V~ 50Hz
MZ 529N
MZ 521N
MZ 530N
MZ 520N
MZ 527N
Under voltage release

(to prevent automatic
restarting of the
controlled device)
Surface mounting enclosure
weatherproof IP55
removable window
w78 x h150 x d95mm
MZ 521N
Emergency stop button

IP65
C.27
Protection
MM 501N
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 62
Surge protective devices

for general protection
SPDs with plug in cartridge with
very high, high and medium discharge current capacity
(65 kA, 40 kA and 15 kA).
SPDs with plug in cartridge
ensure :
- General protection of electrical
or electronic equipment,
- Protection in common and
differential mode for domestic,
industrial and commercial
buildings.
Common characteristics :
SPDs with base and cartridges.
Available in 2 versions :
SPDs with base and plug in
cartridges with an end of life
indication LED
SPDs with base and auxiliary
contact for remote signallings
and plug in cartridges with
reserve protection indicator .
This version, with reserve indicator, shows the intermediary
state, with indication of the need
to change the cartridge before
disconnection, but keeps the
maximal protection capacity till
the end.
For remote signalling, an auxiliary contact (R version) is used to

report the information of condition indication until the end of
life of the product.
The cartridge allows simple
replacement without the need to
cut-off the power supply
SPDs are equipped with
integrated thermic and
dynamic disconnection
Connection capacity of
terminal blocks, (L, N/E) :
- 25 flexible conductor,
- 35 rigid conductor
For auxiliary contact :
- 0.5 mini
- 1.5 maxi
Degree of protection : IP 203
(in enclosure).

see page T.24
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Cat.
ref.

I max. 65 kA
Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz
SPN 265R
I max. 65 kA
Un: 230/400 V 50/60 Hz
SPN 465R
C.28
1 poles 1 Ph + N
with reserve indicator and remote
signalling
Up : 1.5 kV at In
SPN 165R
2 poles 1 Ph + N
signalling
Up : 1.3 kV at In
SPN 265R
4 poles 3 Ph + N
signalling
Up : 1.5 kV at In
SPN 465R
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 63

for general protection
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Cat.
ref.
- Single pole 1 Ph
Up : 2 kV at In
SPN 140C
I max. 40 kA
Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz
- Single pole 1 Ph
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPD 140D
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N
with reserve indicator and remote signalling
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPN 240R
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPD 240D
- 4 poles 3 Ph + N
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPN 440R
- 4 poles 3 Ph + N
Up : 1.2 kV at In
SPD 440D
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N
Up : 1.0 kV at In
SPN 215R
- 2 poles 1 Ph + N
Up : 1.0 kV at In
SPD 215D
- 4 poles 3 Ph + N
Up : 1.0 kV at In
SPN 415R
- 4 poles 3 Ph + N
Up : 1.0 kV at In
SPD 415D
SPN 240R

I max. 15 kA
Un: 230/400 V 50/60 Hz
SPD 415D
Replacement cartridges
for SPDs with plug in cartridge
The cartridge allows simple
replacement without the need to
cut-off the power supply.
Cartridges are available for all

discharge currents (65 kA, 40kA,
15kA) with or without reserve
protection indication.
A keying system exists to

prevent a line cartridge being
interchanged by mistake with a
neutral and vice versa
Designation
Characteristics
Phase for : SPN 265R, SPN 465R
SPN 065R
SPN 140C
SPN 040C
SPN 240R, SPN 440R
SPN 040R
SPD 140D, SPD 240D, SPD 440D
SPD 040D
SPN 215R, SPN 415R
SPN 015R
SPD 215D, SPD 415D
SPD 015D
SPN 065R
Remark :
For a replacement of cartridges,
choose only the same reference
as the previous cartridge.
Cat.
ref.
Neutral for: SPN 265R, SPN 465R,
SPN 065N
SPN 240R, SPN 440R,

SPN 215R, SPN 415R
SPN 040N
SPDxxxD
SPD 040N
SPN 065N
C.29
Protection
Designation
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 64
Monobloc Surge Protection Devices

Description
The range of monobloc SPDs
is adapted for residential and
commercial application.
These SPDs ensure the main
protection of equipment in both
common and differential mode.
The end of life protection is
ensured by a thermal disconnector and clearly indicates with a
visual indication window.
- 25 flexible cables
- 35 rigid cables
SPDs are approved according to
IEC/EN 61643

see page T.24
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty
Cat.
ref.
Monobloc SPDs
Imax = 65kA
Un = 230 / 400V ~
1 Ph+N
In = 35kA
Up = 1.8kV at In
SPM 265E
3 Ph + N
In = 35kA
Up = 1.8kV at In
SPM 465E
1 Ph+N
In = 20kA
Up = 1.5kV at In
SPM 240E
3 Ph + N
In = 20kA
Up = 1.5kV at In
SPM 440E
1 Ph+N
In = 10kA
Up = 1.3kV at In
SPM 220E
3 Ph + N
In = 10kA
Up = 1.3kV at In
SPM 420E
SPM 240E
Monobloc SPDs
Imax = 40kA
Un = 230 / 400V ~
Monobloc SPDs
Imax = 20kA
Un = 230 / 400V ~
SPM 440E
C.30
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 65

for fine protection
SPDs with low valotage
protection level
Protection is assured in both

common and differnetial modes.
Suitable for every earthing system.
To protect very sensitive

electronic equipment.
The fine protection completes
the main protection and can
protect 1 or several electronic
devices.
Optimal coordination is obtained
when cascaded with a main protection device (lower Up see
table below)
Discharge current :
I max. 8 kA (8/20 wave).
- 6 flexible conductor
- 10 rigid conductor .
SPN 208S
A green LED on the front face

indicates the status of the SPD
connected in series with the
equipment that needs to be
protected.
Connected in series with the
equipment that needs to be protected.
Complies with
NF EN 61-643-11
September 2002
Degree of protection : IP 20
(in enclosure).

see page T.24
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
SPD
With low voltage protection level
2 poles 1 Ph + N
SPN 208
With low voltage protection level
2 poles 1 Ph + N
SPN 208S
Un :230/400 V 50/60 Hz
4 poles 3 Ph + N
SPN 408S
Cat.
ref.
Protection
Up (Ph/ N/) : 1,2 kV at In

Up (Ph/N) : 1 kV at In
Voltage protection level with a
main + fine protection :
Up 800 V
SPN 408S

for telephone lines
SPDs for telephone lines.
For the protection of receiver
against transient current surge
vehicled by telephone lines (fax,
modem, etc...)
Protection is assured in both
common and differential modes
In-line connection on telephone

line with receiver to be protected.
Discharge current :
I max 10 kA (8/20 wave).
Complies with
IEC 61643-21
Connection capacity
- 0.5 to 2.5 flexible conductor
- 0.5 to 2.5 rigid conductor
Degree of protection :
IP 10 (in enclosure).

see page T.24
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Cat.
ref.
Voltage surge protection for

analog telephone lines
Un : 130 V
Up : 600 V
SPN 505
Voltage surge protection for

digital telephone lines
Un : 40 V
Up : 600 V
SPN 504
SPN 505
C.31
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 66
Isolating switches
Description
For use as an isolating switch in
all types of circuit as defined in
the IEE wiring regulations
Technical data :
AC 22 duty specification :
IEC 947-3
In : 25, 32A
Shrouded cable clamps
16 rigid conductor
In : 40, 63, 80A
Q version for 32A.
Cable clamps
25 rigid conductor
Designation
characteristics
Single pole
1 x 25A
In : 100A
Cable clamps,
50 rigid conductor
All switches have a green/red
toggle indication giving an
obvious contact indication.
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
250V~
12
SB 125S
1 x 32A
250V~
12
SB 132S
1 x 40A
250V~
12
SB 140S
1 x 63A
250V~
12
SB 163S
1 x 80A
250V~
12
SB 180S
1 x 100A
250V~
12
SB 199S
2 x 25A
400V~
12
SB 225S
2 x 32A
400V~
12
SB 232S
2 x 32A
400V~
SB 232Q
2 x 40A
400V~
SB 240S
2 x 63A
400V~
SB 263S
2 x 80A
400V~
SB 280S
2 x 100A
400V~
SB 299S
3 x 25A
400V~
SB 325S
3 x 32A
400V~
SB 332S
3 x 32A
400V~
SB 332Q
3 x 40A
400V~
SB 340S
3 x 63A
400V~
SB 363S
3 x 80A
400V~
SB 380S
3 x 100A
400V~
SB 399S
4 x 25A
400V~
SB 425S
4 x 32A
400V~
SB 432S
4 x 32A
400V~
SB 432Q
4 x 40A
400V~
SB 440S
4 x 63A
400V~
SB 463S
4 x 80A
400V~
SB 480S
4 x 100A
400V~
SB 499S
SB 125S
Double pole
SB 232S
SB 240S
Triple pole
SB 399S
Four pole
C.32
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 67
2 way / centre off changeover modular switches

Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Switches, 2 ways
Single pole
1 x 25A
250V~
12
SF 118F
1NO + 1NC
2 x 25A
250V~
12
SF 115
Double pole
2 x 25A
250V~
SF 218F
1 x 25A
250V~
12
SF 119F
1 x 40A
250V~
12
SF 119G
2 x 25A
250V~
SF 219F
2 x 40A
250V~
SF 219G
2 x 63A
250V~
SF 263
Triple pole
3 x 40A
400V~
SF 319G
Four pole
4 x 40A
400V~
SF 419G
4 x 63A
400V~
SF 463
MZN 175
SF 118F
Switches,
Centre - off changeover
Single pole
Double pole
SF 263
SF 463
Padlocking kit for

isolating and
changeover switch
Allows locking the

device toggle in the
on / off position
MZN 175
C.33
Protection
SF 219F
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 68
Enclosed fuse combination switches and

The range of enclosed Fuse
Combination Switches (FCS)
and Switch Disconnectors
(LBS) have been designed
for easy installation. The
robust enclosure is made
from 1.2mm CR steel and
the switching device offers
the latest technology to
ensure safe long lasting and
maintenance free operation.

The switches have 4 break
points to ensure that a high
AC rating can be obtained.
The FCS has contacts either
side of the fuses which
ensures that the fuse connections are totally
isolated when the product is
switched off. Operation of
the product is through a

rotary handle that ensures
that the enclosures cannot
be opened when the device
is in the switched on position. The 3 pole devices are
delivered complete with
Neutral Bar & earth point and
the 4 pole with earth point
only. The products have
been independently tested

by Lovag Laboratory and
have a certificate according
to IEC60947-3.
The colour of the enclosure
is RAL 9002
LBS
Very strong
(2mm steel)
knock outs
and removable
gland plate
Positive action door

handle.
Lockable off
Terminal cover
can be top or
Robust 1.2mm steel
FCS
Very strong
(2mm steel)
knock outs
and removable
Terminal cover
can be top or
Accepts BS88 fuses
Key hole mounting slots
Positive action door handle.

Lockable off
C.34
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 69
Enclosed Fuse Combination switches 32-630A

handle is also padlockable in the
off position.
All versions will accept standard
BS88 fuse links and can be
converted to switch
disconnector by fitting copper
links.
Utilisation category
AC23 A/B
Icc : 50kA
Range:
SPSN 20-200A (4 ratings)
TPN 20-630A (12 ratings)
TPSN 20-630A (12 ratings)
IP41
Note:
Maximum rated fuse links are fitted in all fuse combination
switches
Complies with:
BS EN 60-439 part 1 (enclosure)
BS EN 60-947 part 3 (device)
Cable capacity
20A = 16mm2
32A = 16mm2
63A = 25mm2
100A = 95mm2
125A = 95mm2
160A = 95mm2
200A = 240mm2
250A = 240mm2
315A = 240mm2
400A = 240mm2
630A = 300mm2 x 2
800A = 300mm2 x 2

see page T.28
Designation
In
A
Pack
Qty.
Cat.
Ref.
Enclosed FCS
Single pole switched neutral
20A
32A
63A
100A
1
1
1
1
JFB 202S
JFB 203S
JFD 206S
JFE 210S
Triple pole & neutral
20A
32A
63A
100A
125A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JFB 302S
JFB 303S
JFD 306S
JFE 310S
JFG 312S
JFG 316S
JFG 320S
JFG 325S
JFH 331S
JFH 340S
JFI 363S
JFI 380S
Triple pole switched neutral
20A
32A
63A
100A
125A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JFB 402S
JFB 403S
JFD 406S
JFE 410S
JFG 412S
JFG 416S
JFG 420S
JFG 425S
JFH 431S
JFH 440S
JFI 463S
JFI 480S
Cable extension boxes

triple pole & triple pole +
switched neutral
For 125A/160A /200A

For 315A /400A FCS
For 630A / 800A FCS
1
1
1
JZA 701
JZA 702
JZA 703
JFG416
JFG425
Auxiliary contact
1AC type NO
1AC type NC
HZF 301
HZF 302
Terminal cover
100A
125A, 160A
200A to 400A
630A to 800A
2P
HZF 201
3P
HZF
HZF
HZF
HZF
202
202
204
206
4P
HZF
HZF
HZF
HZF
203
203
205
207
C.35
Protection
Description
The Hager range of fuse
combination switches has been
designed to provide individual
protection and control of
individual circuits.
The enclosures up to 200A have
been designed to provide
adequate cabling space without
the need for additional cable
spreader boxes.
Operation of the device is
through a door mounted rotary
handle which is mechanically
interlocked to prevent access to
live conductors when the switch
is in the on position. The
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 70
Switch disconnector / Enclosed load break switches 20-1250A

Description
The Hager range of switch
disconnector has been designed
to provide individual protection
and control of individual circuits
up to 1250A.
The enclosures have been
designed to provide adequate
cabling space without the need
for additional cable spreader
boxes.
Operation of the device is

through a door mounted rotary
handle which is mechanically
interlocked to prevent access to
live conductors when the switch
is in the On position. The
handle is also padlockable in the
Off position.
Complies with:
BS EN 60-439 part 1 (enclosure)
BS EN 60-947 part 3 (device).
IP41
Utilisation category
AC23A
AC22A/B
Cable capacity
20A = 16mm2
32A = 16mm2
63A = 50mm2
100A = 50mm2
125A = 95mm2
160A = 95mm2
200A = 95mm2
250A = 185mm2
315A = 185mm2
400A = 240mm2
630A = 300mm2
800A = 185mm2 x 2
1250A = 185mm2 x 4

see page T.28
Designation
Cat.
Ref
20A
32A
63A
100A
125A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1250A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JAB 302S
JAB 303S
JAB 306S
JAB 310S
JAC 312S
JAC 316S
JAE 320S
JAE 325S
JAG 331S
JAG 340S
JAH 363S
JAH 380S
JAH 390S
Triple pole & switch neutral
20A
32A
63A
100A
125A
160A
200A
250A
315A
400A
630A
800A
1250A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JAB 402S
JAB 403S
JAB 406S
JAB 410S
JAC 412S
JAC 416S
JAE 420S
JAE 425S
JAG 431S
JAG 440S
JAH 463S
JAH 480S
JAH 490S
1
1
1
JZA 700
JZA 701
JZA 702
Cable extension boxes

triple pole & triple pole +
switched neutral
For 125/160A LBS

For 200/250/315/400A LBS
For 630/800A LBS
Auxiliary contact
20A to 100A
125A to 800A
Terminal cover
125A to 200A
250A to 400A
630A
800A
C.36
Pack
Qty.
Enclosed LBS
Triple pole & neutral
JAB 302S
JAG440S
In
A
HZ 021
HZ 023
3P
HZC 201
HZC 203
HZC 205
HZ 036
4P
HZC 202
HZC 204
HZC 206
HZ 046
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 71
Control relays ...

Current control relay used to
survey DC or AC current :
EU 103 single phase product to
monitor DC or AC current direct
via current transformer
The range is composed of modular devices :

Voltage control relays dedicated
to protect air conditioning
equipments :
EU 100, EU 101 single phase
EU 301 three phase
are also used to enter the

parameter settings (type of signal, monitored levels ... )
In case of an error, the relay will
close a contact (changeover
contact 8A)
Phase control relay

EU 300 to verify phase parameters (asymmetry, loss of phase,
undervoltage)
Voltage control relay used to

survey DC or AC voltage :
EU 102 single phase product to
monitor DC or AC
EU 302 three phase control relay
used to check AC voltage
The two digital control relays EU

102 and EU 103 are equipped
with an LCD indicator. During
normal operation, the LCD displays the measured voltage (EU
102) or current (EU 103). The
LCD and the local push buttons
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Air conditioning control relay

Single phase
Power supply 230V AC

Under/over voltage control
Umin : 0,75 Un - Umax : 1,2 Un
Restart duration (5 or 10 minute)
selected via bridge
Output : changeover contact
8A AC1 250V~
EU 100

Single phase
Power supply 230V AC

Umin/Umax : +/-5% to +/-20% Un
defined via potentiometer
selected via switch
8A AC1 250V~
EU 101

Three phase
Power supply Un 400V AC

selected via switch
8A AC1 250V~
EU 301
Phase control relay
Power supply Un 400V AC

Under voltage control
Loss of phase, phase order control
Asymetry control : +/-5% to +/-20%
8A AC1 250V~
EU 300
EU 100

EU 301
C.37
Protection
Control relays are used in installations where the current or the

voltage fluctuation may damage
equipments.
2/19/09
12:03 PM
Page 72
... Control relays
EU 102
C.38
Designation
In/A
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty
Cat.
ref.
Voltage control relay

Single
Power supply 230V~

Voltage monitored DC 15 to 700V
or AC 15 to 480V~
Under or over voltage or both
control
Parameter setting via push button
and LCD indicator
8A AC 250V~
EU 102
Voltage control relay

Three phase
Power supply Un 400V~

2
8A AC1 250V~
EU 302
Current control relay

Single phase
Power supply Un 230V~

2
Current control DC or AC,
55direct 0.1A to 10A or via current
transformer
Under or over current or
both control
Parameter setting via push button
and LCD indicator
8A AC1 250V~
EU 103
2/20/09
7:36 PM
Page 73
Automation & control equipment

D.02
D.03
D.04
D.05
D.06
D.07
D.08
D.09-10
D.11-14
D.15
D.16
D.17
D.18
D.19
D.20
D.21
D.22
D.23
D.24
Latching relays,
Latching relays auxiliaries
Relays, Interface relays
Contactors and override contactors
Time switches and twilight switches selection chart
Electromechanical time switches
Analogue time switches 72 x 72mm
In-wall time
Digital time switches
Time lag switches
Delay timers
Pushbuttons
Indicator lights
Transformers, bells and buzzers
Thermostats
Analogue voltmeters ammeters, Multimeter
Digital voltmeters, ammeters,
Current transformers (C.T.)
Selector switches
Kilowatt hours meters and hours counter
Automation
2009_SEA_D01-40a.qxd
D.1
2/20/09
7:36 PM
Page 74
Latching relays
63
45
44
EPN 510
Description
For the control of lighting
circuits in residential buildings,
small industry buildings and
commercial buildings.
Latching relays operates when
impulsed by a signal voltage.
The impulse can be provided via
a pushbutton or switch. The first
impulse sets the relay into its set
(opposite) state, the next
impulse returns it to its reset
(original) state.
The latching relays are built to

add on optionally the following
auxiliaries :
- an auxiliary for centralised
ON/OFF control EPN 050
- an auxiliary contact for
remote signalling EPN 051
- an auxiliary for multi levelled
centralised control EPN 052
- an auxiliary for control by
maintained contact EPN 053
Designation
Type
Coil
VAC
50Hz
Latching relays
1NO
230
Connection capacity
10 rigid cables
6 flexible cables
Conform to standard
IEC60669-1 and IEC60669-2-7

see pages T.34
Coil
VDC
Power
Circuit
AC1
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
110
16A-250V
12
EPN 510
A1
48
24
16A-250V
EPN 501
A2
24
12
16A-250V
EPN 513
12
16A-250V
EPN 511
16A-250V
EPN 512
230
110
16A-250V
EPN 520
110
48
16A-250V
EPN 523
48
24
16A-250V
EPN 526
24
12
16A-250V
EPN 524
12
16A-250V
EPN 521
16A-250V
EPN 522
A1
A2
2NO
A1
1NC+1NO 230
110
16A-250V
EPN 515
A2
110
48
16A-250V
EPN 516
48
24
16A-250V
EPN 503
24
12
16A-250V
EPN 518
12
16A-250V
EPN 519
230
110
16A-400V
EPN 540
48
24
16A-400V
EPN 548
24
12
16A-400V
EPN 541
EPN 540
D.2
A1
A2
4NO
A1
2NC+2NO 230
110
16A-250V
EPN 525
A2
24
12
16A-250V
EPN 528
A1
3NO+1NC 230
110
16A-400V
EPN 546
A2
2/20/09
7:36 PM
Page 75
Latching relays auxiliaries

58
45
44
Auxiliaries for centralised

control
The EPN 050 allows the
centralised control of several
light sources which can be
turned on or off simultaneously.
The separate switching by
pushing the pushbuttons, which
are connected with the latching
relay, remains possible.
Auxiliary contact
A remote signalling can be
realised with the auxiliary
contact EPN 051.
Connection latching relay +

auxiliary
Several auxiliaries can be
combined with the latching relay.
Auxiliary for control by

maintained contact
When control devices with
permanent impulse are
externally driven, e.g. time
switches or limit switches, an
impulse control directly to the
latching relays coil is possible
with the auxiliary contact
EPN 053.
Connection capacity
10 rigid cables
6 flexible cables
Designation
Voltage supply
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Auxiliary for
centralised control
24 to 230V AC
1/2
EPN 050
2A 250 V AC
1/2
EPN 051
24 to 230V AC
1/2
EPN 052
24 to 230V AC
12 to 110V DC
1/2
EPN 053
The EPN 052 allows an overall

central control of individual
central on/off EPN 050

see pages T.35
Cat.
ref.
11
12
14
EPN 050
Auxiliary contact
21
23
22
24
Auxiliary for
multi levelled
centralised control
31
33
32
34
Automation
EPN 051
EPN 052
Auxiliary for
control by
maintained contact
11
12
14
EPN 053
D.3
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 76
Relays
Description
To provide command of low
power circuits max 16A;
associated with push buttons,
switches, time switches etc to
provide for remote control
applications.
61
45
37
For the command of high power

circuits (20, 40, 63Amps) use
contactors as shown on
page D.05
Conform to standard
EN 61 1095 and IEC 61 1095
The relays will accept an

auxiliary contact for remote
signalling applications.
For the command of VLV circuits
use interface relays EN 145 and
EN 146.
Designation
Type
Coil
AC
50/60Hz
Power
Circuit
AC1
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Relays
1NC+1NO
230V
16A-250V~
12
ER 120
24V
16A-250V~
12
ER 123
12V
16A-250V~
12
ER 124
230V
16A-250V~
ER 135
24V
16A-250V~
ER 138
12V
16A-250V~
ER 139
2NC+2NO
Cat.
ref.
ER 120
Interface relays
Description
To interface between low voltage
and very low voltage circuits to
ensure galvanic insulation
between LV and VLV to 4kV.
Application
Interface between fire alarm,
burglar alarm and other VLV
systems and main distribution
circuits.
Connection capacity
6 rigid cables
4 flexible cables
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Interface relays
VLV/LV 1 way
Coil voltage :
10 to 26V AC/DC
output : 1 changeover contact
max. 5A 230V~
min. 10mA - 12V DC
EN 145
Coil voltage :
230V~ 50Hz
max. 5A 230V~
min. 10mA - 12V DC
EN 146
A1
A2
VLV/LV 1 way
EN 145
A1
A2
D.4
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 77
Contactors and override contactors

Description
Contactors
For the remote switching and
control of power circuits
(25A-63A AC1)
45
37
Override contactors
Allows : - permanent ON
- permanent OFF
Technical data
The choice of contactor
depends upon a number of
parameters, e.g.
- the nature of the supply.
- the power it is switching.

- the characteristics of the load.
- the control voltage required.
All contactors ratings are for
AC1 loads only if the load
differs from AC1 refer to page
Options
Contact choice
- normally open (NO)
- normally closed (NC)
LZ 060 heat dissipation inserts.
ES 237 and ES 238 low noise
version available.
The use of LZ 060

(heat dissipation inserts)
between all contactors installed
or between contactors and
adjacent devices is
recommended.
Auxiliary
25A contactors (except ES 237
and ES 238) will accept
auxiliary, EP 071 contact.
Pack
qty.
Standard
cat. ref.
Override
cat. ref.
ES 110A
Designation
Type
Coil
AC
50/60Hz
Power
Circuit
50/60Hz
Contactors
1NO
230V
25A-250V 1
ES 110
1NO+1NC
230V
110V
24V
25A-250V 1
25A-250V 1
25A-250V 1
1
1
1
ES 210
ES 216
ES 239
2NO
230V
25A-250V 1
low noise 25A-250V 1
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
110V
25A-250V 1
24V
25A-250V 1
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
220
237
240
263
226
224
252
262
ES 220A
2NC
230V
110V
25A-250V 1
25A-250V 1
12
1
ES 230
ES 236
ES 230A
3NO
230V
25A-400V 2
ES 320
ES 320A
3NO+1NC 230V
(1NC=Aux
contact 10A)
25A-400V 2
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
1
1
1
ES 444
ES 345
ES 365
230V
25A-400V 2
low noise 25A-400V 2
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
110V
25A-400V 2
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
24V
25A-400V 2
40A-400V 3
63A-400V 3
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
420
238
440
463
426
446
466
424
442
462
ES 420A
230V
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
ES
430
480
490
436
496
432
492
ES 430A
25A-250V 2
63A-250V 3
25A-250V 2
1
1
1
ES 450
ES 470
ES 242
2A-250V
1/2
EP 071
1/2
10
LZ 060
ES 230A
4NO
ES 320
4NC
110V
24V
2NO+2NC
ES 463
230V
24V
Auxiliary
13
11
14
12
Heat dissipation insert
25A-400V
40A-400V
63A-400V
25A-400V
63A-400V
25A-400V
63A-400V
Width in I
17.5mm

see pages T.36-38
ES 224A
Automation
61
ES 424A
D.5
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 78
Time switches and twilight switches selection chart

Analogue time switches
(72 x 72mm) :

(din rail mounted) :
Width in 1 :
EH 010, EH 011
Width in 2 :
EH 209, EH210, EH 211, EH271
Width in 3 :
EH 110, EH 111, EH 171
Width in 5 :
EH 191
Analogue time switches (din rail mounted)

Technical
characteristics EH010
Width in
17.5mm
Analogue time switches (72 x 72mm)
EH011 EH209 EH210 EH211 EH271 EH110 EH111
Voltage
supply
230V AC
230V AC
Operating
cycle
24 hrs.
24 hrs. 24 hrs.
24 hrs.
24 hrs.
7 days
24 hrs.
Minimum
switching
15 min
15 min 30 min
30 min
30 min
3 hrs.
30 min
15 min
Supply failure
reserve
Manual
override
200 hrs.
200 hrs. 200 hrs.
auto/
on
auto/
on
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
EH171 EH191 EH710 EH711 EH770 EH771
110/
110/
230V AC 230V AC
110/
230V AC
230V AC 230V AC
230V AC
EH 710, EH 711, EH 770, EH 771,

EH 712, EH 715, EH 716
EH715 EH716
230V AC 230V AC 230V AC
230V AC 230V AC 230V AC
230V AC
24 hrs.
7 days 24 hrs./ 24 hrs.

7 days
24 hrs.
7 days
7 days
24 hrs.
24 hrs.
24 hrs.
15 min
2 hrs.
20 min
2 hrs.
2 hrs.
20 min
20 min
20 min
200 hrs.
200 hrs.
200 hrs.
on/off
on/off
on/off
on/off
on/off
on/off
on/off
15 min/ 20 min
2 hrs.
200 hrs. 200 hrs. 200 hrs.
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
auto/
on/off
Twilight switches

Width in 1 :
EG 010,
EG 071
EH712
Width in 3 :
EG 110, EG 170,
EG 171, EG 172,
EG 210, EG 270
Twilight switch
(surface mounted) :
EE 701
EE 170
Digital time switches (din rail mounted)
48V DC
110-240VAC
Twilight switches
Twilight
(din rail mounted)
switch
(surface
Technical
Characteristics
mounted)
EG010 EG071
EG110 EG170 EG172 EG210
EG270
EG293B EG403E EG493E EE100
EE101
EE110 EE170 EE171
EE002
EE003
EE701 EE702
7days
7days
Width in 17.5mm 1
Operating cycles
24hrs
7days
24hrs
7days
7days
24hrs
7days
Yearly
Weekly Yearly
24hrs
Program steps
20
20
20
20
20
20
300
300
300
15min 1min
1min
Voltage supply
230V
230V
230V
230V
12VAC 110/
110/
230V
230V
230V
Surf.
Flush
Surf.
Surf.
Surf.
Flush
Surf.
& DC
230V
230V
N of channels
D.6
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 79
Electromechanical time switches

Description
Electromechanical time
switches 1 channel for daily or
weekly programming.
To control lighting, heating,
household appliances, shop
windows etc...
To improve comfort and save
energy.
Applications
Domestic, commercial and
industrial premises.
DIN rail mounting
Technical data
- programming by captive
segments.
- manual override :
On 1 module devices :
- automatic
- permanent ON
On 2, 3 and 5 module devices :
- automatic
- permanent ON
- permanent OFF
Voltage supply :
110 / 230 VAC 50/60Hz for
EH111, EH 209, EH 210
230VAC 50/60Hz for others
Complies with EN60730

Designation
Characteristics
1 channel
Daily dial
without battery reserve
Output :
1N/O
16A - 250V AC1
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
Minimum switching time:

- 15 min for daily versions (1 and
3 module)
- 2 hours for weekly versions
- 30 min for daily versions (2
module)
- 3 hours 30 mins for weekly
version (2 module)
- 15 min and 2 hours on the
daily+weekly version
1 to 4

see pages T.39 - T.41
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
EH 010
EH 110
EH 011
1 channel
Daily dial
with battery reserve
Output :
1N/O
16A - 250V AC1
Reserve :
200 hours after being
connected for 120 hours
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
EH 111
1 channel
Weekly dial
Output :
1 changeover
16A - 250V AC1
EH 171
Output :
1 changeover
16A - 250V AC1
EH 191
EH 209
EH 210
EH 211
EH 271
EH 010
Reserve :
1 channel
Daily + weekly dial
Automation
Reserve :
EH 111
1 channel
Daily cycle
without battery reserve
Output :
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
Without clockhands
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
EH 211
1 channel
Daily cycle
Reserve :
Output :
1 channel
Weekly cycle
Reserve :
Output :
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
Changeover
16A - 250V AC1
D.7
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 80
Analogue time switches 72 x 72 mm

Description
For daily or weekly
programming.
1 channel for the control of
lighting, heating, household
appliances, shop windows etc..
energy.
Applications
Domestic, commercial and
industrial premises.
Technical data
- suitable for surface, flush or
din rail mounting
- programming by captive
segments
- manual override with automatic
return to programme
- operating reserve : 200 hours
after being connected for 120
hours
- output : voltage free
changeover contact 16A/250V
Daily version :
Programming in steps of
10 minutes.
Minimum time between
2 switching intervals : 20 min
Weekly version :
Programming in steps of one
hour.
- minimum time between
2 switching intervals : 2 hours
- switching accuracy : 10 min

EH 711
Designation
Characteristics
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
1 channel daily cycle
Supply : 230V 50/60Hz
Without battery reserve
EH 710
With battery reserve
EH 711
Economy version
EH 712
EH 770
EH 771
EH 715
EH 716
1 channel weekly cycle
EH 771
D.8
Supply : 230V 50/60Hz
Supply : 110V to 240V 50/60Hz

48V DC
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 81
In-wall time
Saving energy with changing your
simple switch to a walltimer
Daily version
A single program repeated
each day
Weekly version
A different program every
day for 1 week
15 min. programming
internal
2 hour programming
internal
Changeover accuracy :
1 min 30 seconds
Changeover accuracy :
10 minutes
2 - unloosable white
screws are delivered
to install the timer on
the wall
Automation
24 h
7 days
Can easily integrate
each environment,
thanks to its discreet front plate
D.9
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 82
In-wall timer
- Easy to wire (work with 3 wires)
Designed for the time control of
immersion heating boilers, lighting, watering systems, etc... in
home and business applices
- EN 60-730 all models

- Power consumption less than
0.5 VA
Control an incandescent halogen

lamp up to 1000W, compensated or uncompensated
fluorescent lamp up to 400 W
(C = 44F) and compact fluorescent lamp up to 10 x 20 W.
- User friendly
- Quartz accuracy
Operating temperature:
0 C to + 50 C
Technical data
Supply voltage:
120/230 V 10 % 50/60 Hz
Storage temperature:
-20 C to + 60 C
- Time setting by ergonomic

unloosable segments
- Blue zone behind segments is
masked in OFF state and
visible in ON state
- Manual control ON/OFF/AUTO
used as override switch
- Adapted UL type wall box
- Muliti-tension 110/230V 50/60Hz
Accuracy:
1 sec/ 24h
Contact rating:
16 A/ 230V AC1
Insulation class:
II
Daily version :
A single program repeated each
day
- 15 min. programming internal
- Changover accuracy:
1 min 30 seconds
Weekly version :
A different program everyday for
1 week
- 2 hour programming internal
- Changover accuracy:
10 minutes
Protection class:
IP30
Degree of pollution:
Standard

Designation
Positiion
Contact
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
24 hours, 3 terminals
Horizontal
16A SPST supplied
EH 810
7 days, 3 terminals
Horizontal
16A SPST supplied
EH 870
EH810
EH 870
D.10
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 83

Description
For the control of lighting, school
bells (EG 171), pumps, heating,
household appliances, shop
windows, etc...
energy.
Applications :
domestic, schools, colleges,
premises
Technical data
1, 2 or 4 channel :
- programming in 1 minute
increments
- easy programming
- display and control of the
program
- possibility to override the
output (permanent or
temporary)
Operating reserve :
lithium battery total of three
years.
- output : changeover contacts
16A - 250V AC1
- sealable front cover
1 to 4

Designation
Characteristics
5 adjustable pre-recorded programs :
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
EG 010
Capacity :
- 20 program steps
- 230V 50/60Hz
EG 110
Capacity :
- 20 program steps
- 230V 50/60Hz
EG 071
Capacity :
- 20 program steps
- 12V AC/DC
EG 172
Capacity :
- 20 program steps
- 230V 50/60Hz
EG 170
Capacity :
- 20 program steps
- 110V 50/60Hz
EG 270
- 6 commutations per day

- 230V 50/60Hz
D.11
Automation
EG 071
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 84
Compact and flexible
The new Hager digital time switches have Display and buttons are
protected with a cover.
been developed and adapted to suit
todays expectations of contractors and
those of his customers.
Many convenient functions...
Automatic change of Summer / Winter
time,
56 programs steps,
Programming per day or group of days,
Easy manual programming or via
interface and PC programming
software EG003,
Permanent override with the
programming key,
Override : permanent / temporary,
5 years of operating reserve with
lithium battery,
Bar graph for visualization of the daily
profile,
Quick copy and saving of the program
with the EG005 key,
Programmable without mains supply,
Reduced width : 2 modules
... and complementary :
digital time switches EG103E, EG203E
and EG103V
Programming of pulses from 1sec. to
30min.
remote temporary overrides (only
EG103E),
Holiday mode : ON or OFF overrides
between 2 dates
Occupancy simulation,
Back light display.
Programming key EG005
This key has 2 advantages :
- copy and saving of the programs,
- permanent overrides.
When the programming key is inserted in
the time switch the keys program will run
without changing the one which has been
set in the time switch originally. As soon
as the key is removed the time switchs
program will start again.
Back light display for an easier

use (EG103E, EG203E).
Bar graph for visualization of the

daily profile.
Reduced number of
programming and navigation
buttons.
Direct programming key or via
an interface EG003 with his
programming software on PC.
Hager digital time switches
1 and 2 channels, width 2

EG103E
1 channel digital time switch weekly cycle, evolution
EG103V
1 channel digital time switch weekly cycle
EG203E
2 channels digital time switch weekly cycle, evolution
Width Pack
in
qty
2
2
1
1
2
Accessories :
EG003U USB Interface and PC programming software
EG004
Locking jey for time switches 1 and 2 channels
EG005
Programmig key for time switches 1 and 2 channels
EG006
Storage module for 3 programming keys EG004/EG005
1
1
1
4
4 channels, width 4
Locking key EG004

It locks the keyboard in order to avoid any
EG493E
non desirable handling.
4 channels yearly time switch, 102 program steps
Accessories :
programming key for EG400
EG002
D.12
EG003U
USB Interface and PC programming software
L147
storage module for 1 key EG002
1
1
1
10
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 85
... and with a software for a quick and

easy programming
The new 1 and 2 channels digital time

switches, as well as the yearly EG493E
programmers, can also be
programmed via the interface or via the
PC programming software EG003.
1. Select the hager digital time

switch type
A clear display
All the screen is available to display the
information in coloured graphics. The
programming is visualised at a glance.
Flexibility of use
The program saving by project name
makes it easier to research and modify
the programs.
Software extract
2. Select type of commutation
(ON/OFF/Pulse) as well as times and
days of programming ...
nothing easier !
Program steps are

immediately visualised by
graphs.
Automation
Quick programming
A few clicks on your mouse
and you are quicker than
with manual programming !
Evolutionary
Your customer can use
different keys to adapt the
programs to his lifestyle.
Always well-informed
You can print a personalised file for
your customers. Thus all the project
and programming information can be
kept in the electrical distribution board.
In addition, the evolution range offers

to your customer new functionalities,
like programming of a holiday period or
occupancy simulation.
A double - click on a program step is

enough to modify quickly the
programming. The program can be saved
on PC and / or be transferred on the
EG005/EG002 key via the EG003
interface.
D.13
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 86

For use in homes or business
premises. These devices are
designed to manage the operation on loads, such as lighting,
heating, domestic appliances,
windows, etc...in order to improve comfort and save energy.
EG 103E and EG 203E

advanced version :
same basic functions as those of
EG 103B and EG 203B above,
plus additional features :
holidays mode : ON or OFF
overrides set between two
dates
presence simulation
backlighted screen
impulse programming
(1 sec to 30 min)
EG403E, EG293B, EG493E

300 program steps
Programmable ON, OFF,
Impulse or Cyclic output
Input for external override
Hours run counter per output
on EG293B and EG493E
EG 071 : 0,5 to 4,
EG 103E and EG 203E :
1 to 6 flex-wire,
1,5 to 10 rigid wire,
Quick connect terminals
(EG403E, EG293B, EG493E)
0.75 to 2.5
Power suppy :
230 V 50/60 Hz
see pages T.42
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
EG 103E
Output : 1 reverse contact

16 A - 250 V AC 1
supplied with 1 blank key EG 005
EG 203E
Interface and software
for PC via USB link

with software on CD
EG 003U
locking key
(yellow colour)
prevents inadvertent use of EG

clocks (except EG 071 and EG 400)
EG 004
Blank programming key

(grey colour)
for switch clocks EG 103B,

EG 203B, EG 103E, EG 203E
EG 005
for programmer EG 400
EG 002
Storage module
for 3 keys EG 005 or EG 004
EG 006
4-channel annual cycle
Outputs:
2 changeover volt-free contacts + 2NO
10A 250V~ AC1
supplied with 1 programming key
EG007
EG 493E
2 channel annual cycle
Outputs:
2 changeover volt-free contacts
10A 250V~ AC1
EG 293B
Outputs:
2 changeover volt-free contacts + 2NO
10A 250V~ AC1
supplied with 1 programming key
EG007
EG 403E
Designation
Characteristics
Electronic switch clock

1 channel over 7 days
advanced evolution
Output : 1 reverse contact

16 A - 250 V AC 1
supplied with 1 blank key EG 005
Electronic switch clock

1 channel over 7 days
advanced evolution
Width in I
17.5mm
EG 004
EG 203E
EG 005
EG 493E
EG 007
EG 293B
EG 403E
D.14
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 87
Time lag switches

These devices are designad to
save energy and ensure safety.
For example : for building staircase or cellar lighting,
ventilation, pumping, etc...
For impulse control of lamps circuit with automatic opening after
preset time period.
The device includes a 2-position

override switch for permanent or
time-switched lighting.
Automatic recognition of connection type (3 or 4 wires).
Time delay is set by means of a
potentiometer located on the
front face.
Features :
- long service life
- quiet operation
- high quiescent current for
control by lighted pushbutton
(100mA)
(see technical characteristics)
Conform to standards :
NFC 61-113
IEC 60-669
EN 55014

see pages T.45
Designation
Type
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Double time delay time-switch
1 NO
Power supply voltage :

230 V 50/60 Hz
EMN 001
EMN 003
EPS 450
30 sec. to 10 min.
adjustable
with recycling possible
Double time delay time-switch
EMN 003
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
16 A - 250 V AC1
2300 W incandescent
1 NO
Short press
30 sec. to 10 min.
adjustable
with recycling possible

230 V 50/60 Hz
16 A - 250 V AC1
2300 W incandescent
Long press (> 3 s)

fixed 1 hour
with interruption possible
Remote-controlled
time-switch
Serves as an interruptible
time-switch
Adjustable : 5 min. to 1 h with
adjustment possible
permanent latching-relay
1 NO

230 V 50 / 60 Hz
or 8 to 24 V AC / DC
16 A - 250 V AC1
1000 W incandescent
Indicator light of status
display
Automation
EPS 450
D.15
2/20/09
7:37 PM
Page 88
Delay timers
58
45
44
Description
To provide all types of
automatic control i.e. lighting,
ventilation, watering, machine
pre-heating, automatic door and
visual audible indication, cycle
control etc.
Technical data
Voltage range :
12 & 24 to 48V DC
12 & 24 to 230V AC
Adjustable: time delay from 0.1s
to 10hrs.
Led indicator
Applications
For timing and automation in
domestic and commercial
premises. The input signal can
be via various switching devices
(pushbutton, latching switch,
timeclock etc.) and the timed
output used to control the
application.
Complies with EN 60669-2-1
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Delay on
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
Time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
EZN 001
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
Time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
EZN 002
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
time delay T : 0.1s to 10hr
EZN 003
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
EZN 004
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
EZN 005
1 c/o contact
10A / 230V~ AC
EZN 006
Cd
6 max rigid
1.5 - 10 flexible

see pages T.43-44
S
T
Delay off
Cd
EZN 001
S
T
Adjustable time on
Cde
S
T
Timer
Cd
EZN 003
S
T
Symetrical flasher
Cd
S
T
EZN 006
D.16
Multifunction
6 individual functions
including :
delay on
delay off
timer
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 89
Push buttons
- 10 rigid
- 6 flexible
Standard conformity :
IEC 60947-5-1 for push buttons
IEC 62094-1 for indicator llights
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Impulse push button
16A - 250V~
Without indicator light
Contacts : 1NO
12
SVN 311
Contacts : 1NC
12
SVN 321
Contacts : 2NO
12
SVN 331
Contacts : 2NC
12
SVN 341
Contacts : 1NO + 1NC
12
SVN 351
Contacts : 1NO + 1NO
12
SVN 371
Contacts : 1NO + 1NC
12
SVN 391
Push buttons:
2 versions:
impluse push buttons
latching push buttons
67
38
45
These versions with indicator

lights are equipped with LEDs
and with a diffuser green or red
SVN 311
with indicator light

Contacts: 1NO
Green
12
SVN 411
Contacts: 1NC
Red
12
SVN 422
Contacts: 2NO
Red
12
SVN 432
Contacts: 2NC
Green
12
SVN 441
Contacts: 1NO+ 1NC
Red
12
SVN 452
16A - 250V~
With light indicator
Contacts: 1NO
12
SVN 312
Contacts: 1NC
12
SVN 322
Contacts: 2NO
12
SVN 332
Contacts: 2NC
12
SVN 342
Contacts: 1NO+NC
12
SVN 352
SVN 411
Latching push buttons
With indicator light
SVN 332
Contacts: 1NO
Green
12
SVN 413
Contacts: 2NO
Green
12
SVN 433
D.17
Automation
Impulse push buttons
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 90
Indicator lights LED

Indicator light and push buttons:
These products are used for
remote controlling signalisation
of any event in any electric
installation (domestic, tertiary &
industrial)
LED technology providing longer

life, modernised appearance,
integrated label holder
- 10 rigid
- 6 flexible
Standard conformity :
IEC 62094-1 for indicator llights
Designation
Characteristics
Colour
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Single indicator light

230 V ~
With light:
Green
12
SVN 121
Red
12
SVN 122
Orange
12
SVN 123
Blue
12
SVN 124
Color less
12
SVN 125
Cat.
ref.
SVN 122
SVN 125 SVN 121
SVN 123
SVN 124
SVN 127
D.18
Double indicator light

230 V ~
With light:
Green and red
12
SVN 126
Triple indicator light
With light:
Red
12
SVN 127
Low voltage indicator light

12 to 48 V ~
AC/DC
With light:
Green
12
SVN 131
Red
12
SVN 132
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 91
Transformers, bells and buzzers

58
Description
Transformers ensure an electrical
separation between primary and
secondary circuits.
They provide extra safety low
voltage 8, 12, 24V~
45
44
Technical data
Secondary voltages:
8V, 12V, 24V~
Bell transformers are
short-circuit protected.
Bells/buzzers:
Max. continuous duty
< 30 minutes.
Connection capacities : 6
Cable clamp type
Output:
Bells: 85 dBA
Buzzers: 78 dBA
When a bell transformer is
installed in an enclosure with
mains voltage equipment, 230V
cable should be used on the
secondary side of the
transformer or extra low voltage
cable should be sheathed within
the enclosure.
Note : the transformers have a

higher no load voltage. The
stated voltages correspond to
the voltages on nominal load.

see pages T.46
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Safety transformers
16VA
ST 313
230V 12-24V~
50/60Hz
25VA
ST 312
40VA
ST 314
60VA
ST 315
230V/8V~
4VA - 8-12V : 0.33A
ST 301
230V/8-12V~
8VA - 8V : 1A
12V : 0.67A
ST 303
230V/8-12V~
16VA - 8V : 2A
12V : 1.33A
24V : 0.67A
ST 305
8/12V~
4VA - 0.35A
12
SU 212
230V~
6.5VA - 0.03A
12
SU 213
8/12V~
4VA - 0.35A
12
SU 214
230V~
6.5VA - 0.03A
12
SU 215
Bell transformers
50/60Hz
ST 301
Bells
SU 212
Buzzers
SU 214
D.19
Automation
ST 313
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 92
Thermostats
Description
Electronic thermostats for any
application requesting
temperature control (from cold
room to steam room).
Application
Several probes can be
associated, according to the
application. example :
EK 081 fixed ambient probe for
night temperature regulation.
EK 083 probe used as floor
probe to limit floor temperature.
EK 083 probe (with its collar) for
the control of hot water circuit.

In case of probe disconnection,
3 working modes are possible
(selected by wiring) :
1. permanent off
2. permanent on
3. cyclical operation 1 minute in
every four.
The position of the relay is
displayed by a pilot light.
Electronic thermostat suitable
for heating control
Two adjustable temperature
levels are selected by external
signals (operation by time switch

or digital programmer).
Additionally there is an
adjustable low level for frost
protection. In the event of probe
disconnection the heating
system is switched on one
minute in every four.

Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Multi-range thermostats
delivered without probe
to associate with EK 081
and EK 083 probes.
Voltage rating : 230V~ 50/60Hz

2A - 230V~
4 ranges :
-30 to 0C
0 to +30C
+30 to +60C
+60 to +90C
to associate with contactors
EK 186
Multi-order thermostat
delivered without probe
to associate with EK 081
and EK 082 probes
Voltage rating :
230V~ - 50/60 Hz
output: 1 changeover contact
2A - 230V~
temperature level 1 (comfort)
adjustable 5 - 30C
temperature level 2 (night setting)
adjustable 2 - 8C less than
level 1 setting
temperature level 3 (frost setting)
adjustable 5 - 30C
to associate with contactors
EK 187
EK 186
accuracy 0.2C
EK 187
Fixed ambient probe
Can be associated with :

EK 186, EK 187 thermostats
EG 502 programmable
thermostat
EK 081
Adjustable ambient probe

the probe is equipped with
a potentiometer for the
correction of the
temperature (3C)

EK 187 thermostat
EG 502 programmable
thermostat
EK 082
Universal probe
removable collar

EK 186 thermostat
EK 083
EK 081
EK 082
EK 083
D.20
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 93
Analogue voltmeters, ammeters

Analogue voltmeters
For indications of line or phase
voltages
58
45
44
Single phase :
direct connection
Three phase :
use of a voltmeter selector
switch SK 602
Frequency : 50/60Hz
Analogue ammeters
For indications of AC currents
Direct reading :
SM 005 : 0 - 5A
SM 015 : 0 - 15A
SM 030 : 0 - 30A
Indirect reading via current
transformers :
50, 100, 150, 250, 400, 600A
Rigid conductor 10

Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Voltmeter
Accuracy : 1,5%
consumption : 2.5VA
0 - 500V
SM 500
Analog ammeter
direct reading
Accuracy : 1,5%
consumption : 2.5VA
direct reading :
0 - 5A
SM 005
0 - 15A
SM 015
0 - 30A
SM 030
0 - 50A
SM 050
0 - 100A
SM 100
0 - 150A
SM 150
0 - 250A
SM 250
0 - 400A
SM 400
0 - 600A
SM 600
Analog ammeter
current transformer
operated
SM 030
Accuracy : 1,5%
Automation
SM 500
Multimeter
Multimeter
For monitoring three-phase
electrical network with or
without neutral and single-phase
network. When connected to CT
(not provided), it can display 3
electrical measurements at
once, with current, average or

maximum values (TRMS effective values of voltage and intensity, phase by phase).
In generating set monitoring

applications, the device can be
used to measure the generating
set frequency and operation
time.
see pages T.48
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Multimeter
- 3 voltmeters : 35 480 V
- 3 ammeters by CT 5 A :
5 to 600 A
- measurement of frequency :
40 to 80 Hz
- time counting
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
SM 001
SM 001
D.21
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 94
Digital voltmeters, ammeters

Digital voltmeters
SM501
For indications of line or phase
voltages
Three phase :
use of a voltmeter selector
switch SK 602
Digital ammeters
SM 020, SM 151, SM 401,
SM 601
SM 020 : direct reading
SM 401, SM 601 : reading via a
current transformer (see below)

Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Digital voltmeters
Voltage rating :
220/230V; 50/60Hz
accuracy : 1%
consumption : 4VA
scale : 0 - 500V
SM 501
Digital ammeters
Voltage rating :
220/230V; 50/60Hz
accuracy : 1%
consumption : 4VA
- Direct
Scale : 0-20A
SM 020
- Reading via CT150/5A

(SR 151)
Scale : 0-150A
SM 151
- Reading via CT 400/5A

(SR 400)
Scale : 0-400A
SM 401
- Reading via CT 600/5A

(SR 600)
Scale : 0-600A
SM 601
SM 501
Cat.
ref.
SM 020
Current transformers (C.T.)

Description :
Current transformers are used to
feed analogue and digital
ammeters. As well as kWh
meters.
Their current on secondary

circuit (0-5A) is proportional to
the current on primary circuit
class : 1
can be mounted on copper bar

or on cable
can be mounted on DIN rail with
adpators
see pages T.47
SR 300
D.22
Designation
Characteristics
Current transformers (CT)
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Ratio :
50/5
SR 051
100/5
SR 101
150/5
SR 151
200/5
SR 200
250/5
SR 250
300/5
SR 300
400/5
SR 400
600/5
SR 600
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 95
Selector switches
Description
For use with voltmeters and
ammeters
Application
Complies with CEI 204, 292,
337, 408
Terminal capacity : 2.5mm
isolating voltage 50Vac
nominal current 20A
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
1 pole selector switch
1 contact o/c
20A 400V~
Non spring return
SK 600
2 contacts NC/NO
20A 400V~
with return to position
when not actioned
SK 601
20A 400V~
SK 602
20A 400V~
or with current
transformers / 5A
SK 603
20A 400V~
SK 604
10A 400V~
SK 606
SK 001
2 pole selector switch

SK 602
Selector switch for

voltmeters
7 positions
1
L1 L2 0 L1
L2
L2 L3
L1
L2
L3
N
L3 L1
L3
10 6 2 12
SK 603
Selector switch for

ammeters
4 positions
11
9
0
L1
L2
L3
L1
L3
4 10 2
L2
Step selector switch

3
5 3 7
SK 606
Key selector switch
0
1
Spare key for SK606
D.23
Automation
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 96
Kilowatt hours meters and hours counter
45
57
41
Description
Kilowatt hours meters measure
the active energy used in an
electric installation. The range
includes meters with pulsed
output for remote indication or
linking into an energy
management system.
Kwh meters can be used for
local metering of installation or
monitoring individual machines.
Options :
- pulsed output
- total / partial counter

see pages T.53
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Single phase
Direct reading
230V 50Hz
20mA to 32A
without pulsed output
without part metering
EC 050
230V 50Hz
20mA to 32A
with pulsed output
without part metering
EC 051
230V 50Hz
100/5A CT operated / single tariff
EC 120
230V 50Hz
100/5A CT operated / dual tariff
EC 121
230/400V 50Hz
800mA to 80A / single tariff
EC 310
230/400V 50Hz
800mA to 80A / dual tariff
EC 311
110/230V 60Hz
800mA to 80A / single tariff
EC 312
230/400V 50Hz
50 - 1500/5A CT operated
single tariff
EC 320
230/400V 50Hz
dual tariff
EC 321
110/230V 60Hz
single tariff
EC 322
EC 001
EC 100
Single phase
CT operated
Three phase
Direct reading
EC 121
Three phase
CT operated
EC 321
D.24
Displays
LCD - 7 digits
Designation
EC 051
EC 100
The kilowatt meter offers now

2 options :
- total counter (non resettable)
and resettable counter(shows
energy used since last reset)
- Single or dual tariff
Sealing kit
For single phase Kwh meters

direct reading only
(EC 110, EC 111, EC 112,
& EC 113)
Hours counter
230V 50Hz
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 97
Automation & control

equipment
D.26
D.27-28
D.29
D.30
D.31
D.32-33
D.34
D.35
D.36-37
D.38
D.39
Dimmers range overview

Dimmers
Dimmers system : 1/10V pilots
Emergency lighting module,
Remote control for emergency light blocks
Twilight switches
Light sensitive switch, 2 channel up to 20kLx
Remote telephone interface
Detection automatic lighting systems
Motion detector
360 motion detector, Presence detector
Smoke detector
Automation
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 98
Dimmers
range overview
functioning as a standalone product

functioning in system : association of dimmers
0W 20W 60W 100W 300W 600W 1000W with 1/10V max 30 x 1kW
Incandescent/halogen 230V
EV 102 pilot : switch to master position
EV 011, EV 012
EV 002, EV 004
EV 100, EV 102 switch to local position
EV 102 + n x EV 100 or EV 102 (slave position)
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) ferromagnetic transformer suitable

for dimming.
The transformer shouldnt be used
with less than 75% of nominal load
EV 011
Halogen VLV (12 or 24V) via electronic

transformer
EV 012
EV 002, EV 004
EV 002, EV 004
1/10V control (output only)

fluo with electroballast 1/10V
Input 1/10 V, 50 mA
EV 106
EV 108 with scene inputs
300 W
600 W
1000 W
Pilot 1/10 V
EV 011
EV 012
EV 002
EV 004
EV 100
EV 102
EV 106
EV 108
Technical features
Controls available
- on the product
- external with illuminated pushbutton
- input 1/10 V
- ambient lighting setting
yes
-
yes
yes
1 (EV 004)
yes
yes
yes (slave)
-
yes
yes
yes (slave)
2 levels
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
2 levels
Types of outputs :
- direct (capacitive/inductive load)
- input 1/10 V
yes
-
yes
-
yes
-
yes
yes (master)
yes
yes
Functions :
- protection overheating / overloads
- level indicator
- memorisation
- softstart
yes *
yes
yes
yes
EV 004
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
-
Parameter setting :
- mini, max. level
- dimming speed
- speed at start / stop
- transition speed for level call
EV 004
EV 004
EV 004
-
yes
-
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
* EV 011 : protection via integrated fuse, electronic protection for other products
Dimmers 300 W
Universal dimmers 600 W
System dimmers
Universal dimmers 1000 W
System dimmers
1-10 V pilots
EV 011
EV 002
EV 100
EV 106
D.26
EV 012
EV 004
EV 102
EV 108
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 99
Dimmers
The Hager products are suitable
for all light sources : incandescent, LV and VLV halogen, fluorescent with electronic ballast.
Dimming controlled by
push button :
- start/stop by short press
- increasing/decreasing by
maintaining pressure
EV 011
Common characteristics :
- softstart (progressive start) to
increase the working live of
lamps
- memorisation of last dimming
level
- protection against overheating
- control possible by illuminated
pushbutton until 5mA.
Dimmer
300 W :
- control by several pushbuttons
- can replace a latching relay
with dimming function
Type (inductive/capacitive)
- electronic protection against
overheating and overload
- Indicators :
230 V / overheating / overload
Dimmers 600 and 1000 W :

- universal products with
automatic recognition of the
load
For technical details

see page T.57-T.63
Designation
Characteristics
Dimmers 300 W
For :
- incandescent 230 V
- halogen 230 V
- VLV halogen lamps with :
ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive load EV 011 )
dimmable electronic transformer
( capacitive load (EV 012 )
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
20 ... 300 W / VA
230 V / 50 Hz
Inductive load
EV 011
Capacitive load
EV 012
Universal remote control dimmer

600 W
For :
- incandescent 230 V
- halogen 230 V
- VLV halogen lamps supplied
by ferromagnetic or dimmable
electronic transformer
(cos 0,95)
20 ... 600 W / VA
230 V / 50 Hz
- products with automatic load
recognition
- dimming function
EV 002
Enhanced universal dimmer 600 W
In addition to EV 002 features :

- min/max level setting
- recall mode with pushbutton,
override mode with switch
- scene level setting 0 ... 99 %
EV 004
Automation
EV 004
D.27
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 100
Dimmers
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Universal dimmer 1000 W for :

Functional mode selection via
local switch :
- control via pushbutton (local)
- remote control via 1/10V
(slave)
230 V / 50 Hz
EV 100
EV 102
20 ...1 000W
1/10V-input
Min/Max setting via

potentiometer
EV 100
LED indication :
- 230V power supply/load error
- overload / overheating
Load type :
- incandescent
- 230V halogen lamps
- VLV halogen lamps associated
to ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive)
- VLV halogen lamps associated
to electronic transformer
(capacitive)
Universal dimmer 1000 W with

scene inputs
Functional mode selection via
local switch :
- control via pushbutton (local)
- remote control via 1/10V (slave)
- control of the other dimmers
via 1/10V (master)
EV 102
Display to show the dim level

and to set the parameters:
- dimming rise time (4s ..99s)
- min dim level (0...49%)
- max dim level (51..99%)
- rise time when switching ON
(1s..99s)
- fall time when switching OFF
(1s..99s)
- scene level
- dimming rise time for each
scene
- scene working mode :
recall or override mode
Output contact to display the
dim state (load is OFF, contact is
opened, if load is dimmed the
contact is closed)
LED indication :
- 230V power supply / load error
- overload / overheating
Load type :
- incandescent
- 230V halogen lamps
- VLV halogen lamps associated to
ferromagnetic transformer
(inductive)
- VLV halogen lamps associated to
electronic transformer
(capacitive)
D.28
230 V / 50 Hz
20 ...1 000W
1/10V-input/output
(max. 50mA, 30 EV100 / EV102)
defined via the local switch
Contact output :
1 NO, 250V , 5A
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 101
Dimmer system : 1/10V pilots

EV 106 and EV 108 pilot
dimmers
To control several dimmers or
electronic ballasts via the
1/10V output
and for parameter setting
Wiring of illuminated
pushbuttons possible up to
5mA
EV 106
Min/max level setting

Contact output for state
information
Dimming rise time setting
Setting of rise time and fall
time
EV 108 pilot dimmer

Scene inputs used for override
(3 levels) or simple recall
(2 levels).
Use :
to control lighting in meeting and
conference rooms, or in restaurants
Dimmers are conform to standards :

EN 50081-1, EN 50082-1,
CEI 669-1, CEI 669-2-1.
For technical details

see page T.57-T.63
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
1/10V pilot dimmer
230 V / 50 Hz
To control
EV 100 and EV 102 (max. 30)
To dim electronic ballasts
Wiring of illuminated
pushbuttons possible up to
5mA
and to set the parameters:
- dimming rise time (4 s ..99s)
- min dim level (0..49%)
- max. dim level (51..99%)
1/10V - interface
Output /max 50mA
Cat.
ref.
EV 106
Contact output :
1 NO, 250 V 10 A
Contact output to display the

dim state (load is OFF, contact is
opened, if load is dimmed the
contact is closed). It is used to
switch ON/OFF the electronic
ballast
1/10V pilot dimmer with scene input
In addition to EV106 features :
Scene inputs used for override (3 levels) or simple recall (2)
For each scene
- dimming rise time
- scene level
- and scene mode (recall or- override)
EV 108
Automation
EV 108
D.29
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 102
Emergency lighting module

Application :
For residential and commercial
premises.
Installed in a consumer unit or

distribution board, the lamp can
be configured to light
automatically in the event of
power failure.
It can also be withdrawn from its

base, thereby acting as a mini
torch with an operating duration
of 1 hour 30min.
see page T.66
Designation
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Emergency lighting module
EE 960
EE 960
Remote control for emergency light blocks

The remote control device switches self contained emergency
lighting into neutral position or
into working position.
The remote control is

recommended in premises for
public and in industrial or
commercial premises.
It permits each day after closing

down of premises, to switch off
self contained emergency lighting to avoid the discharge of
battery.
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Remote control
Power supply :
230 V 50/60 Hz
EE 905
EE 910
Remote control
To control up to 120 self
contained,
with an average consumption of
0,1 mA / 6 V
D.30
6 flexible wire
10 rigid wire

see page T.66
To control up to 60 self
contained,
with an average consumption of
0,1 mA / 6 V
EE 910
The device is a 2 position changeover switch, with automatic

recall for switching off or on, of
self contained emergency lighting, by delivering polarized current impulses on the remote
control circuits (+ or -)
Output supply : 8,4 V ...

time delay for power supply :
24 hours before activation of
remote control
Power supply :
230 V 50/60 Hz
Output supply : 12 V ...
time delay for power supply :
24 hours before activation of
remote control
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 103
Twilight switches
Description
The light sensitive switch
controls light systems according
to daylight level :
- the user sets the switching
level
- the photo cell measures the
external light level.
Applications
Domestic and commercial
premises.
Technical data
Supply : 230V +10%-15% 50Hz
1 changeover contact 16A 250V
Selection switch : (EE100,
EE 101, EE 110)
5 to 100 lux
50 to 2000 lux
4 position override switch
allowing :
- auto : normal operation mode
- on : permanently switched-on
- off : permanently switched-off
- test : setting mode for easy
adjustment
A light indicator when installing

shows the status on of the
contact.

see pages T.56
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Twilight switch
with surface cell
EE 003
Adjustable
5 to 100 lux, 50 to 2000 lux
Fixed ON/OFF delay: 15 to 60s
Changeover 16A AC1 250V
EE 100
Twilight switch
with flush cell
EE 002
Adjustable
5 to 100 lux, 50 to 2000 lux
Fixed ON/OFF delay: 15 to 60s
Changeover 16A AC1 250V
EE 101
Programmable twilight
switch with surface cell
Daily cycle
electromech. switch
EE 110
Weekly cycle
electronical program
8 presetted programs
EE 170
Weekly cycle
electronical program
free setting
EE 171
Compact twilight
switch
IP55 Integrated Cell
10 or 30 lux
ON delay : 40s/ OFF delay : 120s
8A AC1
EE 701
Adjustable : 2 to 2000 lux

Adjustable : 1s to 120s
16A : AC1
EE 702
Flush cell
IP54 for EE100, 101, 110 & 170
EE 002
Surface cell
IP54 for EE100, 101, 110 & 170
EE 003
EE 100
EE 002
EE 003
D.31
Automation
EE 702
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 104

Light sensitive switch, 2 channel
up to 20kLx
EE200, 201, 202, 203
With those devices, the energy
costs for the lighting are easy to
reduced. The switching On/Off
can be achieved according the
outdoor light level.
ON delay, OFF delay and a 10%

hysteresis are inserted to avoid
hazardous switching.
The test mode permits to set the
lux level, the ON and OFF delay
and the hysteresis are inhibited
during the tests. The lux level
can be defined for each channel
via a potentiometer.

see pages T.64
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Two channels light sensitive

switch up to 20kLx
The lux level is measured via a
photo resistor
The output is switched on/off
accordingly the pre defined
lux level Slave device when
used with an EE202/EE203
230 V 50/60Hz
EE 200
EE 201
2 contact NO 16 A 250 V AC1

2 state switch :
- automatic
- test
For each channel :
4 state switch to select
- ON
- OFF
- 2...200 Lux
- 200... 20 000 Lux
EE 200
Potentiometer to set lux level

led to show the output state.
ON / OFF delay : 30s
Hysteresis : 10%

switch up to 20kLx
EE200 with EE002 cell :
D.32
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 105

Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Pack
qty.

switch up to 20kLx, comfort
The device offers two functional
modes, that may be defined to
control both channels together.
230 V 50/60Hz
EE 202
EE 203
EE 202
Semi-automatic (mode 2) :
The input E1 is used to defined
authorization periods (presence
230V at E1 means lighting is
authorized).
During the authorization period,
the light is switched ON/OFF
according the lux level. A push
button connected at input E2
permits to switch on/off the
light.
Out of the authorization period,
the switching on duration is limited to the predefined duration
set via the potentiometer.
Cascading feature :
Several EE202 may be connected together. A sensor is
connected at the master EE202,
the slaves get the measurement
from the master.

switch up to 20kLx
EE 202 with EE 002 cell :
2 contact NO 16 A 250 V AC1

Potentionmeter to set lux level
Led to show the output state.

Hysteresis : 10%
Input 1 : 230V input used to
connect a switch (eg : time
switch, motion detector)
Input 2 : 230V input used to
connect a push button (manual
switch ON/OFF of the light)
2 state switch :
- automatic
- test
Potentiometer to set functional

mode :
- mode 1
- derogation time for mode 2 :
1 min., 5 min., 10 min., 30
min., 45 min., 1h30, 2h
For each channel :
4 state switch to select
- ON
- OFF
- 2...200 Lux
- 200... 20 000 Lux
Potentionmeter to set lux level
Led to show the output state.
Hysteresis : 10%
Automation
Automatic mode (mode 1) :

The switching ON/OFF of the
outputs is done accordingly the
lux level.
A time switch connected at
input E1 can be used to enable
or disable the automatic mode.
The input E2 used with a push
button permits to temporally
toggle the output state of both
channels.
(Example : the lighting has been
switched OFF via the automatic,
the push button may switch ON,
the switching OFF occurs again
with the automatic).
Cat.
ref.
D.33
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 106
Remote telephone interface

Telephonic remote control :
It allows to command, from any
fixed or mobile telephone,
setting to work or stopping of
different electrical circuits.

see pages T.65
TH 020B
D.34
Designation
Characteristics
Width in I
17.5mm
Cat.
ref.
Telephone gateway, 3 inputs, 3

outputs
Electrical characteristics :
power supply : 230V, +/-15%,
50/60Hz
Consumption : 2W
Analog telephone line (PSTN),
48VDC
3 relay output 5A-250V AC1
1 temperature measurement,
CTN 10kOhm
2 alarm inputs : 1 input 030VAC/DC, 5mA min
1 input 0-230V AC, 5mA min
Power shutdown detection
TH 020B
Functions
- remote control : 3 relay outputs
- status indication : for each
output
- convivial voice guide in English
- remote alarm detection and
sending of voice messages
towards 3 programmed tele
phone numbers
- recording of your own
messages
- voice messages for room
temperature indication
possibility to use together with
an answering machine on the
same telephone line
Personal secret code to limit
access to the device
Timed switch-off of the relay
output (from 1 second up to
59h 59min 59sec)
Environment :
working temperature : 0/+50C
Storage temperaure : -20/+70C
IP 30, IK03
Connection :
flexible 2*2.5mm2 max
rigid : 2*2.5mm2 max
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 107
Detection Automatic
Lighting Systems
This family groups together all the devices fo automatic
control of lighting in both the residential and private /
public industry sectors.
They enhance security for exterior accesses to residential
homes, garages and halls, and guarantee significant
savings in lighting power consumption by illuminating
only when necessary.
Features
A solution for each type of application.
A design of pleasant and harmonious curves.
Automation
An integration of the control function at the lighting level.
D.35
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 108
Motion detector
Features :
Large range:
from 200 basic to 220/360
comfort
An IP55 reinforced
waterproofing
Detection head with
overmoulded fresnel lenses
and pyro detectors
Vertical and horizontal

orientation and shutters to
adjust the detection area
Local seting time and lux via
potentiometers and quick set
feature to ease the setting
Installation and wiring with
quick connect terminals
Wall mounting with a wall

bracket that offers numerous
wiring and mounting
possibilities
Technical
Power supply:
Basic detector
230 VAC + 10% (50/60 Hz)
10A AC1 relay and cut phase
Designation
EE830
EE840
EE870
Enhanced detector
230 VAC + 10%/ -15%
Output:
16A AC1 relay potential free
Detection
angle
Colour
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Basic range
Lumimat S220 white/ Motion detector
200
white
EE 830
Lumimat S220 anthracite/ Motion detector
200
anthracite
EE 831
Lumimat S360 white/ Motion detector
360
white
EE 840
Lumimat S360 anthracite/ Motion detector
360
anthracite
EE 841
Enhanced range
Lumimat E220 white/ Motion detector comfort
220
white
EE 860
Lumimat E220 anthracite/ Motion detector

comfort
220
anthracite
EE 861
Lumimat TWIN white/ Motion detector comfort
220 + 360 = Twin
white
EE 870
Lumimat TWIN anthracite/ Motion detector

comfort
220 + 360 = Twin
anthracite
EE 871
Accessories
IR remote control
EE 806
Corner bracket for Lumimat S140/S200
white
EE 825
anthracite
EE 826
white
EE 827
anthracite
EE 828
white
EE 855
anthracite
EE 856
EE871
EE806
Ceiling bracket for Lumimat S140/S200
Corner bracket for Lumimat S140/S220/TWIN

EE825
D.36
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 109
Motion detector
Features :
Halogen floodlights equipped
with an infrared detector,
allowing easy replacement of
an existing lighting device in
order to ensure automatic
lighting when a person or an
animal approaches.
Integrated detector sensitive

to infrared radiation, for
functioning day and night, or
only at night.
Also allows controlling

additional lamps for total
maximum supplementary load
of 500W.
IP55 reinforced waterproofing
Designation
Detection angle
Cutoff
power
Contact
Halogen floodlights equipped

with an infrared detector
Lumimat P150 black
140
Lumimat P150 white
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
150 W
52035
140
150 W
52038
Lumimat P150 black
200
150 W
52545
Lumimat P150 white
200
150 W
52546
Lumimat P500 black
140
500 W
52031
Lumimat P500 white
140
500 W
52032
Lumimat P500 black
200
500 W
52541
Lumimat P500 white
200
500 W
52542
52545
Automation
52546
D.37
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 110
360 Motion detector

Features :
Movement detector for the
automatic control of lighting in
walk circulation zones. Flush
fitting or surface mounting.
Adjustable integrated twilight

switch function.
Mounting of Tectomat 360 SE
in a standard 75mm dia. wall
box and fastening by two
spring clips.
Designation
Mounting of Tectomat 360 S

flush fit on wire outlet, on
connecting box or on
mouldings thanks to side
pre-cutouts.
Mounting
Cutoff
power
Tectomat 360S
Surface mounting
Tectomat 360SE
Flush fitting
Control of lighting by 8A, AC1

230V contact.
Mounting in parallel possible.
Contact
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
1000 W incan
EE 804
1000 W incan
EE 805
Infrared movement
detectors for interior
lighting, ceiling mounted
EE804
EE805
Presence detector
Features :
The double lens of the
Tectomat Presios offers an
exceptional fineness in
infrared detection. Micro
movements are sufficient to
switch on and maintain the
light on. They are particularly
adapted for controlling the
lighting of offices, conference
rooms, class rooms, etc.
Lights are inhibited from being

switched on if natural light is
sufficient in the room.
Master/slave operation, to
synchronise several detectors.
The Tectomat Presio IR

version allows maintaining, in
addition to presence
detection, a constant
illumination level by variation,
regardless of the lighting
conditions.
The orientable head allows

adapting the detection zone
according to the rooms con
figuration.
Designation
The 2 S version allows, in

addition, controlling another
lighting circuit or vertilation. A
pushbutton input is used to
override.
IP41
Output
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
Tectomat Presio 1S
1 lighting output
EE 810
Tectomat Presio 1S
2 output
EE 811
Tectomat Presio 1R
1 x 1/10V output for light regulation
EE 812
Accessories for surface mounting
Presence detector
EE 813
Presence detectors over 360 for

interior lighting, ceiling mounted
EE810
EE813
D.38
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 111
Smoke detector
Description :
This optical smoke detector is
intended for the protection of
private apartments in buildings,
or homes, mobile homes and
motor homes.
It can be:
- used as standalone unit, or
- inter-connected in wired
network of up to 40 detectors.
Fixing :
Fixing with flush-mounting box
- For boxes of 60mm diameter:
Use holes marked 60
Technical characteristics :
- Type of detection:
optical smoke detector
- Operating temperature:
-10C -> +55C
- Average coverage: 50m2
- Storage temperature:
-10C -> +60C
- For boxes of 85mm diameter:

Use holes marked 85
- Use: interior
- Protection class: IP32
- Fix the base using suitable

screws.
- Wired interconnection:
up to 40 detectors.
- Dimensions (D xH):
125mm x 48mm
- Maximum cable length:

400m max
- Weight: 210g
- Maximum cable diameter:

1.5mm2
Designation
- Standard:
DIN EN 14604 :2005
Colour
Pack
qty.
Cat.
ref.
White
TG 500A
Silver
TG 500B
Brown
TG 500C
White
TG 501A
Silver
TG 501B
Brown
TG 501C
Battery-operated smoke detector
TG500A
Warning smoke detector 230V
D.39
Automation
TG501B
2/20/09
7:38 PM
Page 112
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 113
Technical information
Enclosures
T.2 Ingress protection
T.3 Mini Gamma, Cosmos & Golf enclosure
dimensions
T.4 Vector enclosures - IP55
T.5 ICOS, IU, Invicta TP&N
T.6 Vega dimensions
T.7 Orion enclosure dimensions - steel
T.8 Orion enclosure dimensions - polyester
T.9 Volta flush enclosures
Technical guide
2009_SEA_T01-68a.qxd
T.1
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 114
Ingress protection
The Ingress Protection (IP) for all
low voltage enclosures up to
1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c. is
defined in identical fashion by
the standards BSEN 60529 - IEC
529 it comprises the letters IP
followed by two character
numerals:
The first character numeral

indicates the degree of
protection provided by the
enclosure with respect to
persons, also to the equipment
inside the enclosure
The second character numeral

indicates the degree of
protection provided by the
enclosure with respect to
harmful ingress of water; a third
character may be used to
indicate mechanical strength.
An x signifies that no test has
been carried out
Protection against solid substances
Protection against solid substances
Short
description
Non - protected
Definition
IP
No special protection
A large surface of
the body, such as a
hand (but no protection
against deliberate
access) solid objects
exceeding 50mm in
diameter.
Protected against Dripping water (vertically)

dripping water
falling drops) shall have no
harmful effect
50mm
Protected against
solid objects
greater than
50mm
Fingers or similar objects

not exceeding 80mm in
length; solid objects
exceeding 12,5mm in
diameter
12.5mm
Protected against
solid objects
greater than
12,5mm
Protected against
dripping water
when titled up
to 15
Tools, wires, etc...., of

diameter or thickness
greater than 2,5 mm;
solid objects exceeding
2,5 mm in diameter
2.5mm
Protected against
solid objects
greater than
2,5 mm
Protected against Water falling as a spray at

spraying water
an angle up to 60 from
greater than
the vertical shall have no
harmful effect
Protected against
solid objects
greater than
1,0 mm
Wires or strips of
thickness greater than
1,0 mm; solid objects
exceeding 1,0 mm in
diameter
Protected against Water splashed against

splashing water
the enclosure from any
direction shall have no
harmful effect
Dust-protected
Ingress of dust is not

totally prevented but dust
does not enter in
sufficient quantity to
interfere with satisfactory
operation of the
equipment
Protected against Water projected by a

water jets
nozzle against the
enclosure from any
direction shall have no
harmful effect
Dust - light
No ingress of dust
Protected against Water from heavy seas

heavy seas
or water projected in
powerful jets shall not
enter the enclosure in
harmful quantities
IP
Test
0
1
T.2
Test
Example : V 504 weatherproof

enclosure IP 54 the table
below gives the explanation of
the two numerals
Short
description
Non - protected
15 cm
Definition
No special protection
Vertically dripping water

shall have no harmful
effect when the enclosure
is titled at any angle up to
15 from its normal position
Protected against Ingess of water in a

the effect of
harmful quantity shall not
immersion
be possible when the
enclosure is immersed in
water under defined
conditions of pressure and
time
Protected against The equipment is suitable
submersion
for continous submersion
in water under conditions
which shall be specified by
the manufacturer
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 115
Mini Gamma, Cosmos & Golf enclosure

dimensions
A
References
Dimensions enclosures
A
H
Depth
55
160
82
110
180
82
148
180
82
182
180
82
218
180
82
GD102B
GD104B
GD106B
GD108B
GD110B
Fixing
E
31
86
124
157
194
F
94
114
114
114
114
Cosmos enclosures, flush mounting

4
C 008F
8
12
C 012F
124
194
264
130
200
270
45
23
160
195
C 004F
61
12
Golf enclosures
Flush mounting
D
between rails 125
References
Dimension (mm)
Fixing
VF 04..
1 row 4
180
220
73
90
140
177
VF 08..
1 row 8
250
230
77
94
209
189
VF 12..
1 row 12 322
265
80
97
281
224
VF 24..
2 row 24 322
390
80
97
281
349
VF 36..
3 row 36 322
535
80
97
281
494
Surface mounting
D
References
Dimension (mm)
Fixing
E
VS 04..
1 row 4
130
180
86
VS 08..
1 row 8
200
180
86
120
140
VS 12..
1 row 12 275
225
95
205
160
VS 24..
2 row 24 275
350
95
205
285
VS 36..
3 frow 36 275
500
95
205
410
Technical guide
between rails 125
T.3
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 116

Vector IP55 enclosures
VE 212U - 2 rows 24
Dimensions
151
References
59
73,5
150
47,5
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
VE
103U
106U
110U
112U
212U
312U
412U
118U
218U
318U
3
6
10
12
24
36
48
18
36
54
Enclosure sizes
R
A
1
111
1
165
1
237
1
310
2
310
3
310
4
310
1
418
2
418
3
418
Connection assembly
Mounting on insulating support at both end of the chassis
1. additional connection assembly : VZ 403 or VZ 428
2. insulated terminal VZ 743
Enclosure
Reference
VE 103U
VE 106U
VE 110U
VE 112U
VE 118U
VE 212U
VE 218U
VE 312U
VE 318U
VE 412U
T.4
Knock outs
Supplied cable bushes
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3 x M20
2 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
4 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
10 x M20 + 2 x M25 + 1 x M32
8 x M20 + 10 x M25 + 1 x M32
14 x M20 + 4 x M25 + 1 x M32
8 x M20 + 14 x M25 + 1 x M32
14 x M20 + 10 x M25 + 2 x M32
8 x M20 + 18 x M25 + 2 x M32
14 x M20 + 10 x M25 + 1 x M32
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
M20
M20 + 1 x M25 + 1 x M30/32
M20/32 + 1 x M25 + 3 x M20
M20/32/40 + 2 x M25/32 + 3 x M25 + 6 x M20
M20/40/50 + 2 x M20/32 + 12 x M25 + 2 x M20
M20/32/40 + 2 x M25/32 + 3 x M25 + 6 x M20
M20/40/50 + 2 x M20/32 + 12 x M25 + 2 x M20
M20/32/40 + 2 x M25/32 + 3 x M25 + 6 x M20
M20/40/50 + 2 x M20/32 + 12 x M25 + 2 x M20
M20/32/40 + 2 x M25/32 + 3 x M25 + 6 x M20
H
175
190
210
302
427
552
677
302
452
602
Wall box
E
108
180
230
230
230
230
338
338
338
F
119
126
136
155
280
405
550
155
305
455
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 117
ICOS, IU
ICOS dimensions
Cat. ref.
ICOS5
ICOS8
ICOS12
ICOS18
Dimensions (mm)
Height H
Width W
170
137.5
170
190
210
297
210
404
Depth D
98
98
105
105
IU dimensions
W
D
Modules/
Row
13 modules
H
18 modules
N of Rows
Reference
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
IU13S
IU26S
IU39S
IU52S
IU18S
IU36S
IU54S
IU72S
IU90S
Dimensions
W
H
255
275
355
380
355
530
355
680
475
275
475
380
475
530
475
680
475
830
D
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
Invicta TP & N distribution boards

Distribution boards - dimensions
TP ways
4
6
8
10
12
16
18
Height H
546,2
599,6
653
706,4
759,8
866,6
920
Width W
385
385
385
385
385
385
385
Depth D
109,7
109,7
109,7
109,7
109,7
109,7
109,7
Reference
JK 04PA
JK 06PA
JK 08PA
JK 12PA
JK 16PA
N of ways
4
6
8
12
16
A (mm)
292.80
346.20
399.60
506.40
613.20
B (mm)
221.60
275
328.40
435.20
542
Technical guide
Pan - assembly (see drawing beside)

C (mm)
217.60
271
T.5
2/25/09
1:59 PM
Page 118
Vega dimensions
VB 36 - 2 rows 36
Dimensions
145
VB 18J
150
VB
VB
VB
VB
VB
VB
VB
18W
36J
36W
54J
54W
72J
72W
370
370
370
370
370
370
370
370
300
300
450
450
600
600
750
750
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
236
236
386
386
536
536
686
686
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
150
18
18
36
36
54
54
72
72
Measurement scale for fixing centres
Insulation cap for screw heads
Cable tie facility
Conduit entry
Cable tie plates for conduit and trunking
T.6
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 119
Orion Plus- metal enclosures IP 65

Metal enclosures Orion Plus
Mounting plate
B2
A1
E3
B1
F
F1
F2
22
H1
F3
note : foresee A + 25 mm to open the door
E1
E
E2
16
Dimensions
references
rows
outside fixing
enclosure
inside fixing
B1
B2
E1
E2
F1
F2
FL 102A
250
300
160
195
80
200
250
210
320
220
332
169
208
FL 104A
300
350
160
245
80
250
300
260
370
272
382
219
258
FL 105A
300
350
200
245
120
250
300
260
370
272
382
219
258
FL 110A
300
500
200
245
120
250
450
260
370
422
532
219
408
FL 112A
400
500
200
345
120
350
450
360
470
422
532
319
408
FL 117A
400
650
200
345
120
350
600
360
470
572
682
319
558
FL 118A
400
650
250
345
170
350
600
360
470
572
682
319
558
FL 119A
500
650
200
445
120
450
600
460
570
572
682
419
558
FL 120A
500
650
250
445
170
450
600
460
570
572
682
419
558
FL 122A
500
800
250
-------
FL 123A
600
800
250
545
170
550
750
560
670
722
832
519
708
FL 124A
600
800
300
545
220
550
750
560
670
722
832
519
708
FL 125A
600
950
250
545
170
550
900
560
670
872
982
519
858
FL 126A
600
950
300
545
220
550
900
560
670
872
982
519
858
FL 127A
800
950
250
745
170
750
900
760
870
872
982
719
858
FL 128A
800
950
300
745
220
750
900
760
870
872
982
719
858
FL 130A
800
1250
300
745
220
750
1200
760
870
1172
1282
719
1158
Dimensions of mounting plates

perforated plates
for enclosures
dimensions plates
plates fixing
A1
H1
E3
F3
FL 402A
FL 472A
FL 102A
193
280
169
208
FL 404A
FL 473A
FL 104A, FL 105A, FL 204B
243
330
219
258
FL 407A
FL 474A
FL 110A, FL 209B
243
480
219
258
FL 408A
FL 475A
FL 112A, FL 213B
343
480
219
408
FL 412A
FL 476A
FL 117A, FL 118A, FL 216B
343
630
319
408
FL 413A
FL 477A
FL 120A, FL 221B
443
630
319
558
FL 415A
FL 479A
FL 123A, FL 124A, FL 229B
543
780
319
558
FL 416A
FL 480A
FL 125A, FL 126A
543
930
419
558
FL 417A
FL 481A
FL 127A, FL 128A
743
930
419
558
FL 419A
FL 483A
FL 130A
743
1230
519
708
FL 512E
FL 302B
493
1080
519
708
FL 520E
FL 352B, FL 354B
693
480
519
858
FL 521E
FL 352B
693
780
519
858
FL 522E
FL 327B, FL 354B
693
1080
719
858
FL 531E
FL 368B
993
780
719
858
FL 532E
FL 368B
993
1080
719
1158
Technical guide
full plates
T.7
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 120
Orion Plus - GRP enclosures IP 65

GRP enclosures Orion Plus
D1
235
H1
F2
F
F1
E
E1
E2
C
note : foresee A + 25 mm
to open the door
Dimensions
references
rows
enclosure
A
H1
inside fixing
outside fixing
D1
E1
E2
F1
F2
FL 204B
300
350
160
250
300
219
258
339
339
269
389
FL 209B
300
500
200
250
450
219
408
339
339
419
539
FL 213B
400
500
200
350
450
319
408
439
439
419
539
FL 216B
400
650
200
350
600
319
558
439
439
569
689
FL 221B
500
650
250
450
600
419
558
539
539
569
689
FL 229B
600
800
300
550
750
519
708
639
639
719
839
FL 302B
600
1150
300
500
1050
FL 327B
850
1200
300
750
1050
FL 352B
850
1450
810
300
750
750
510
FL 354B
850
1750
1100
300
750
1050
510
FL 368B
1100
2050
1110
300
1000
1050
510
T.8
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 121

VU 24NSG
12
24
36
48

R
1
2
3
4
Outside
A
B
348
356
348
505
348
630
348
755
Wall mounting bracket
Connecting two enclosures
Conduit entry
Cable entry plate
Connection assembly
Mounting of lock and key
Inside
E
315
315
315
315
F
322
471
596
721
Technical guide
Enclosure
Volta
VU 12NSG
VU 24NSG
VU 36NSG
VU 48NSG
T.9
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 122
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 123
Protection devices
T.12
T.13
T.15
T.17
T.18
T.19
T.20
T.21
T.23
T.24
T.28
T.29

Torrods for Earth Leakage Relays
MCB
MCB 125A
Remote control and automatic reset
auxiliary device
Auxiliaries
RCD add-on blocks
RCCB (ELCB)
Technical information motor starters
Surge protection devices
Enclosed fuse combination switch
Control relays
Technical guide
T.11
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 124

Technical specifications
nonadjustable ELR adjustable ELR
HR 404
HR 410
Relays power supply voltage 50/60 Hz 230 V 20%
Controlled mains voltage 50/60 Hz
50 to 700 V
Absorbed power
3 VA
5 VA
Control output
inverter free of potential
breaking capacity (standard output,
6 A / 250 V AC1
positive security, pre-alarm 50%)
HR 421
HR 422 HR423
5 VA
10VA
sensitivity In
0.03A/0.1A/0.3A/
0.5A/1A/2A/3A
0.03A/0.1A/0.3A/
0.5A/1A/3A/5A/10A
0.03A/0.1A/0.3A/
0.5A/1A/2A/3A
time delay ( 20%)
instantaneous
0/0.1s./0.3s/0.4s./
0.5s/1s/3s
0/0.1s./0.2s./0.25s/ 0.3s/0.4s./0.5s
0.03A/0.1A0.5A/1A/3A 0.03A/0.1A/0.3A
0.3A/0.5A 5A/10A/
0.5A/1A/3A
1A/3A/10A 20A/30A
acceptable overload at torrod level
30 kA / 100 ms
voltage of test and reset BP

maximum lentgh of test/reset conection
maxi. lentgh of torrod/relay connection
relay connection : cage terminals rigid
flexible
torrod connection
rigid
flexible
100 250 V
200 m
2
50 m maxi
with twisted
cable 1,5 mm - 25m with nontwisted cable
2
2
1.5 mm2 to 4 mm 2
1.0 mm2 to 2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm2 to 4 mm 2
1.0 mm to 6 mm
operating temperature
storage temperature
-10 to +55 C
-25 to +70 C
diameter integrated torrod

EMC immunity according to EN61000
30V/m at 1890 MHz
Main characteristics
reset push button : in case of tripping, the output remains
commutated and the return to normal position is made by :
- pushing the reset push button
- a power cut.
rest push button : it allows to verify, by a simulation, the good
functioning of the relay in case of fault.
Fault indicator : it is switched on when fault of the supervised
installation.Intermittent when there is a breaking of the
relay/torrod connection.
Supply indicator : good functioning of the product.
In ratings
Temporization t
- sealing adjustments : all modifications of adjustment can be
done by a sealing cover.
Standard output (1 OF) : tripping at 85% of In 15 %.
Goes from 0 to 1 when :
- fault when torrod/relay connection
- fault current when supervised installation.
or positive safety output :
Goes to 1 when supply, goes from 1 to 0 when :
- fault of torrod/relay connection,
- fault current when supervised installation,
- supply fault or internal relay fault.
Input for changing the output contact :

from standard output contact to positive safety output contact : 0 V =
standard contact
----- 220 V = positive safety contact
HR440 / HR441
0.1s/0.3s/0.5s/0.75s/
1s
25 - 35 mm
Pre-alarm output : the contact closes itself at 50% of In

(15%)
Remote test and reset
Barregraph (HR 420) : indicates continuously the value of the

leakage current, 5 to 15 %, 15 to 30 %, 30 to 45 %, 45 to 60 %
and 60 to 75 % of In.
Product presentation
N Ph
9
10
11
HR 421
12
11
75
ON
60
0,5
0,3
0,1
0,03
0,3 0,4 0,5

0,25
0,2
0,1
0
1 2 3
I n(A)
45
30
t(s)
15
2
Test
Reset
N
7
10
Load controlled settings : any setting change can be prevented by

using a lead controlled cover.
Electrical connection
Wiring diagram for contactors.
N L1 L2 L3
Wiring diagram for MCB + shunt trip.
9 10 11 12
9 10 11 12
HR 421
HR 421
1
5
2 3
Reset
Test
T.12
2 3
Test
Reset
N L1 L2 L3
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 125

Circular section torrods :
HR841 - HR844
E
63
33
F
HR 841
HR 842
HR 843
HR 844
A (mm)
35
70
105
140
D
8
6,5
79
110
146
196
100
130
170
220
D (mm)
35
52
72
97
E (mm)
43
57
73
98
F (mm)
26
32
38
48,5
G (mm)
48,5
66
94
123
48 mm
Rectangular section torrods :

HR 830, HR 831, HR 832
Dimensions for circular and rectangular section torrods
B (mm)
C (mm)
Cat. ref
A1
A2
35
92
86
43.5
74 17
32.5 5.5
HR 802
70
115 118
60.5
97 17
32.5 5.5
HR 803
105
158 16.5
84.5 140 15
32.5 5.5
HR 804
140
202 203 103.5 178 21
32.5 7.5
HR 805
210
290 295
32.5 7.5
HR 830
70 175
260 162
85 225 22
40 7.5
HR 831
- 115 305
400 225
116 360 25
48 8.5
HR 832
- 150 350
460 270
140 415 28
48 8.5
HR 801
A2
A1
2,5
14
C
Overall dimensions (in mm)

E
150 265 23
Opening rectangular section torrods :

B
Dimensions of opening rectangular section torrods

D
A2
HR 820
20
HR 821
50
30
89
110
41
32
46
80
114
145
50
32
46
HR 822
80
80
145
145
50
32
46
HR 823
80
121
145
185
50
32
46
HR 824
80
161
184
244
70
37
46
A2
A1
A1
Technical guide
T.13
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 126

Torrod capacity
On copper
cables
U 1000 R2V
one conductor
cable
U 1000 R2V
one conductor cable
U 1000 R2V
two conductor
cable
torrod
torrod
torrod
U 1000 R2V
U 1000 R2V
four conductor partially stripped
four-conductor
cable
cable
torrod
torrod
U 1000 R2V
partially stripped
two-conductor
cable
torrod
torrod inside
2
30
4 x 16 mm
35
4 x 25 mm
70
105
2 x 50 mm
2 x 70 mm
2
4 x 185 mm
4 x 500 mm
140
4 x 630 mm
210
4 x 630 mm
70 x 175
4 x 630 mm
115 x 305
4 x 630 mm
150 x 350
4 x 630 mm
20 x 30
4 x 16 mm
50 x 80
80 x 80
4 x 240 mm
4 x 500 mm
80 x 120
4 x 630 mm
80 x 160
4 x 630 mm
On copper
H07 V - U
1 conductor
Cables
35 mm
35 mm
2
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 150 mm
35 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 185 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 70 mm
35 mm
2
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 185 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 185 mm
2
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
2 x 630 mm to 4 x 240 mm
H07 V - U
1 conductor
torrod
torrod
Torrod inside
2
30
4 x 35 mm
35
4 x 50 mm
2 x 70 mm
2 x 95 mm
2
70
4 x 240 mm
105
4 x 400 mm
140
4 x 400 mm
210
4 x 400 mm
70 x 175
4 x 400 mm
115 x 305
4 x 400 mm
150 x 350
4 x 400 mm
20 x 30
4 x 10 mm
50 x 80
4 x 185 mm
80 x 80
4 x 400 mm
80 x 120
4 x 400 mm
80 x 160
T.14
4 x 400 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 185 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 35 mm
2 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
2 x 400 mm to 4 x 240 mm
35 mm
50 mm
240 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
10 mm
120 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
35 mm
50 mm
70 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
16 mm
150 mm
300 mm
300 mm
300 mm
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 127
MCB
1000
600
400
1000
600
400
1000
600
400
200
200
200
100
60
40
100
60
40
100
60
40
20
10
6
4
2
1
0,6
0,4
20
10
6
4
2
0,1
0,04
0,04
10
6
4
2
0,2
0,2
0,1
20
1
0,6
0,4
1
0,6
0,4
0,2
Type D curve
Time (sec)
10000
6000
4000
3600
2000
Time (sec)
Type C curve
10000
6000
4000
3600
2000
Time (sec)
Type B curve
10000
6000
4000
3600
2000
0,02
0,02
0,02
0,01
0,004
0,01
0,004
0,01
0,004
1,5
1,13
1,45
10
15
20 30
40
I / In
0,1
0,04
1,5
1,13
1,45
10
15
20 30
40
1,5
1,13
1,45
10
15
20 30
40
I / In
I / In
Electrical characteristics
Working temperature
Tropicalisation
MY_ _ _E MT_ _ A
1 - 63A
6 - 63A
MU_ _ _A NB_ _ _A NC_ _ _A NDN__ _A NRN_ _ _ HMX_ _ _ HLE/F HMB/C/D HMK_ _ _

2 - 63A
6 - 63A
0.5 - 63A 0.5 - 63A 0.5 - 63A 10 - 63A 80-125A 80-125A 80-125A
4.5kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
10kA
10kA
10KAIC
22KAIC
22KAIC
230/400Vac (max. 440Vac)
500V
0.5 to 32A 20 000 operations
40 to 125A 10 000 operations
-5C to +60C
Treatment 2 with relative humidity
B/C
B/C/D
10kA
15kA
30KAIC
10kA
15kA
30KAIC
10kA
15kA
30KAIC
15/25kA
30KAIC
50kA
-
10kA
15kA
10kA
15kA
240 / 415Vac
30kA
-
95% at 55C
Correction factor
Depending on the model selected some of the breaker is calibrated
at a temperature of 30C in accordance to IEC 898.
Temperature correction
Grouping factor (rated current reduce by factor K)
In (A)
30C
35C
40C
45C
50C
55C
60C
0.5
0.5
0.47
0.45
0.4
0.38
0.95
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
1.
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
No. of units n
n=1
2n<4
4n<6
6n
2.8
2.
2.
2.
2.1
1.9
3.7
3.
3.3
2.8
2.5
5.6
5.3
4.6
4.2
3.8
10
10
9.4
8.8
7.5
6.4
16
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
20
20
18.5
17.5
16.5
15
14
13
25
25
23.5
22
20.5
19
17.5
16
32
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
40
40
37.5
35
33
30
28
25
50
50
47
44
41
38
35
32
63
63
59
55
51
48
44
40
80
80
77.6
75.1
72.6
70
67.2
64.4
100
100
96.6
93.1
89.4
85.6
81.6
77.5
125
125
121.9 118.9 115.7 112.4 109.1 105.6
K
1
0.95
0.9
0 .85
Frequency
Thermal - Unchanged
Magnetic - Value multiplied by coefficient K
F (Hz)
K
17Hz - 60Hz
1
100Hz
1.1
200Hz
1.2
400Hz
1.5
Technical guide
MCB type
Current rating
Tripping curve
B: 3 - 5In
C: 5 - 10In
D: 10 - 20In
Breaking capacity
EN 60 898 & IEC 898
IEC 947 - 2
NEMA AB - 1
Rated voltage - 50/60Hz
Isolating voltage
Electrical endurance
Installation
Working position : vertically, horizontally or flat.
Supply : feed from either top or bottom terminals.
T.15
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 128
MCB
I2T characteristics curve
Peak current in kA
energy let - through kA2s
Current limitation curve
Estimated short - circuit in kA
Estimated short - circuit in kA
Power loss
The power loss of MCBs is closely controlled by the standards and
is calculated on the basis of the voltage drop across the main
terminals measured at rated current. The power loss of Hager circuit
breakers is very much lower than that required by the IEC Standard,
so in consequences run cooler and are less affected when mounted
together.
The table below gives the watts loss per pole at rated current.
MCB rated
current (A)
0.5
Watt loss per 1.3

pole (W)
10
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100
125
1.5
1.7
2.1
2.4
2.7
1.8
2.6
2;8
3.3
3.9
4.3
4.8
5.2
5.5
DC applications
Because of their quick make and break design and excellent arc
quenching capabilities Hager circuit breakers are suitable for use on
DC. When selecting a circuit breaker for any DC application it is
necessary to consider two main points.
1. rated current
The thermal time/current characteristics is unaffected so that the circuit breaker will carry its rated current and operate within its designated thermal time/current zone at 40C Derating for higher ambient
temperatures and grouping apply exactly the same as AC applications. The instantaneous magnetic trip is affected however, becoming less sensitive, requiring 2 times the AC operating current. The
table below shows the upper and lower limits of both B and C
instantaneous characteristic curves for 50Hz C and DC applications.
Thermal unchanged. Magnetic trip increased as table below.
Characteristics curve
magnetic trip
Irm 1
Irm 2
T.16
B
50Hz
3In
5In
DC
3In
7.5In
C
50Hz
5In
10In
DC
5In
15In
2. system voltage
The system voltage and the type of system determines the number
of poles required to provide the necessary breaking capacity and
arc control. The table below gives the mximum DC voltage and
breaking capacity for one pole or two poles connected in the series;
The positioning of these breaking poles in the system depends on
whether the system is earthed or insulated and if it is earthed
whether one polarity is earthed or the centre point is earthed.
MCB Breaking capacity
pole/60V
2 poles in
series/125V
MY
10kA
10kA
MT
15kA
15kA
MU
15kA
15kA
NB
20kA
20kA
NC
20kA
20kA
ND
15kA
15kA
NM
10kA
10kA
NR
20kA
20kA
HLE
10kA
10kA
HLF
10kA
10kA
HMB 15kA
15kA
HMC 15kA
15kA
HMD 15kA
15kA
Magnetic
4 poles intripping
series/250V
5
3
5
20kA
3
20kA
5
15kA
13
10kA
5
20kA
5
10kA
3
10kA
5
15kA
3
15kA
5
15kA
13
15In
7.5In
15In
7.5In
15In
28In
15In
15In
7,5In
15In
7,5In
15In
28In
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 129
Miniature Circuit breakers 125A

Current limiting at 400 V
MCBs : HMB
MCBs : HMC
10000
10000
125 A
100 A
80 A
4000
1000
1000
400
intensit crte en kA2s
80 A, 100 A, 125 A
100
40
10
4
1
0,4 1
10
40
100
1000
10000
100000
Icc en A
80 A, 100 A, 125 A
400
125 A
100 A
80 A
4000
100
40
10
4
0,4 1
10
40
100
1000
10000
Icc en A
100000
MCBs : HMC
10000
125 A
100 A
80 A
4000
1000
400
125 A
100 A
80 A
100
40
10
4
0,4 1
10
40
100
1000
10000
Icc en A
100000
Short circuit limiting at 400 V

MCBs : HMB, HMC
MCBs : HMD
10000
10000
80 A, 100 A, 125 A
80 A, 100 A, 125 A
5000

Intensit crte en kA
Intensit crte en kA
5000
1000
500
500
Technical guide
1000
100
100
100
500
1000
5000
10000
40000
Icc en A
100
500
1000
5000
10000
Icc en A
40000

T.17
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 130
Remote control and automatic resetting

auxiliary device
MZ901 - MZ911 - Working principle
The position of front side selector defines the functioning modes
of the products: off & on remote control, automatic reclosing
auto, locking of the auxiliary
, resetting for the auxiliary
reset.
Resetting of the auxiliary - position of front side selector reset

This position locks all controls and automatic resetting. The auxiliary
is initialized if the position is kept over 5s: time delays and number
of tripping are reset.
Remote control position of front side selector off & on

The remote control on, off, reset and
are operational
(input n2 to n8)
Counting of contact openings on fault current:
- 1 < number of tripping <3, control on is operational after 3 min
or 30s time delay side selector )
- Number of trippings = 3, control on is locked.
Unlocking possible with local selector or remote control reset.
Locking of the auxiliary position of front side selector

This position locks all controls and automatic reclosing.
Automatic reclosing (only on MZ910) - position of front side

selector auto
The automatic reclosing is operational as well as the remote
controls on, off, reset and
(input n2 to n8)
Transient fault: if tripping occurs more than 2s after closing.
- number of automatic reclosing and on control are unlimited.
Automatic reclosing or control on are locked for 3 min or 30s
(side selector ) after each tripping.
Permanent fault: if tripping occurs in 2s after closing, this fault is
counted:
- 1 < number of tripping < 3, automatic reclosing or control on
is locked for 3 min or 30s (selector ) after each tripping
- number of tripping = 3, automatic reclosing and control on is
locked. Unlocking possible with local selector or remote control
reset.
on (input n2) and of (input n4) remote controls

Off has priority with regard to the on and the automatic
reclosing.
Connection diagram
Supervision
a and b signal outputs indicate the position of the handle of
the associated product or the states of the remote control auxiliary.
N L1 L2 L3
Ph
N
MZ 900
off & on
+ reset
1
2
1 3
MZ 910
off & on + auto
off & on
+ reset
MZ 901
MZ 911
a b
4 6 8 10
time
set
T.18
For the functioning modes off & on and auto, the remote
controls on, off, reset and
are operational
(input n2 to n8).
These controls can be made by a contact such as pushbutton or
closing switch (e.g. automation, supervisor, clocks, etc...)
reset (input n6) remote control

This control initializes the product mainly the number of tripping and
the time delay (3 min or 30sec) and padlocks on and automatic
reclosing.
(input n8) remote control

This control locks on and automatic reclosing. The off is
available.
a b
on
o
Controlled device ON
off
Controlled device OFF
end of cycle
tripped
//reset/faulty/
Tripped or end of cycle (tripped 3x)

Padlocking or reset
(by remote control on position of selector) /
Controlled device out of order
The indicator light indicates the state of product and allows a

diagnosis.
14 16 18
on
off r
e
s
e
t
30s
3
3min
Position of time set side selector

Time delay 3 min before remote control on or automatic reclosing
is recommended for the associated products.
For specific installations, when continuity of service is required side
selector can be set on 30s except for MCBs and RCBOs.
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 131
Auxiliaries
Functions
Tripping and indication auxiliary contacts are common to the range
of Hager MCBs and RCCBs.
They should be mounted on the left hand side of the device.
MZN 203 / MZN 204 shunt trip

Allows tripping of the device by feeding the coil. It is fitted with internal contacts which allow it to be fed by an impulse or latched feed.
The contacts also allow for remote indication of operation.
Auxiliary contact MZ 201

Allows remote indication of the status of the device contacts to
which it is associated.
MZN 205 / MZN 206 under voltage release

Allows the MCB to trip when the voltage drops or by pressing a
remote off switch (ie emergency stop).
Alarm contact MZ 202

The alarm or signal contact will provide indication if the breaker trips
under fault conditions
Note
Default indication auxiliaries and shunt trips or under voltage
releases are fitted with tripping indications and reset facility.
Emergency switch - off with under voltage release
Sizes
Note : control circuit must be protected using a maximum 6A

curve C MCB.
Recapitulative table
MZ 201
MZ 202
1O + 1C
230V~ 6A
440V~ 3A
1O + 1C
230V~ 6A
440V~ 3A
CZ 001
2X
1O + 1C
230V~ 6A
400V~ 3A
MZ 203
MZ 204
MZ 205
MZ 206
230 to 415V~
110 to 130V=
50Hz
24 to 48V~
12 to 48V=
50Hz
48V
230V~
50Hz
50Hz
Grouping / combination of several auxiliaries
Technical guide
On 2, 3 and 4 pole MCBs it is possible to associate 3 auxiliaries 2 indication auxiliaries and 1 release auxiliary. In this case, it is
important to first fix the indication auxiliary (MZ 201 and MZ 202)
and then the release auxiliary (MZ 203/204 and MZ 205/206)
T.19
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 132
RCD add-on blocks

Assembly of the add-on blocks 63 A and 80-125A
In
A specific keying
system will
prevent assembly
of an add-on
block of a rating
lower than the
one of the MCB.
By pushing the lock button it
will bolt both devices together
mechanically, thus forbidding a
dismantling of the products without deteriorating the add-on
block (compliance to annex G of
standard EN 61-009) .
Dimensions of associated MCB / add-on block

E
E
E
2 P.P. 6 to 63 A
4
2 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A
9
3 P.P. 6 to 25 A
5
3 P.P. 32 to 63 A
6
3 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A
10.5
4 P.P. 6 to 25 A
6
4 P.P. 32 to 63 A
7
4 P.P. 6 to 63 A *
7
4 P.P. HM 80 to 125 A
12
add-on blocks 25, 40, 63, 80, 100

and 125A
* 4 pole add-on blocks
two output
Wiring diagram for MCB+Add-on block from 25 to 125A

incoming
1
Test
Connection capacities :
2
2
for assembled products from 6 to 25A : 6 mm / 10 mm
2
2
for assembled products from 32 to 63 A : 10 mm / 25 mm
2
2
for assembled products from 80 to 125A : 35 mm / 70 mm
If the supply of the add-on block is done from the bottom it should
be clearly indicated.
use
T.20
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 133
RCCB (ELCB)
Residual current devices
A residual current device (RCD) is the generic term for a device
which monitors the current in the line conductor and the neutral
conductor of a circuit in an earthed system.
The drawing opposite shows how a torroid is located around the
line and neutral conductors to measure the magnetic fields created
by the current flowing in these conductors. The sum of the magnetic
fileds set up by these currents (which takes into consideration both
the magnetic and phase relationship of the currents) is detected by
the torroid.
In a normal heathy circuit the vector sum of the current values
added together will be zero. Current flowing to earth, due to a line
earth fault, will return wia the hearth conductor, and regardless of
load conditions will register as a fault. This current flow will give rise
to a residual current (Ires) which will be detected by the device.
It is most important that the line and neutral conductors are passed
through the torroid. A common cause of nuisance operation is the
failure to connect the neutral through the device.
RCCBs work just as well on three phase or three phase and neutral
circuits, but when the neutral is distributed it must pass through the
torroid.
RCCB are not suitable for use on DC systems and unearthed networks.
1. whole house protection

2. selective protection
Whole house protection is provided typically by a consumer unit
where the RCCB device serves as the main switch. Although very
popular this suffers from a disadvantage : all circuits are disconnected in the event of fault. Selective protection can be provided by
associating the RCCB with identified high risk circuits by adopting
one or more of the following :
Split busbar consumer unit
All circuits are fed via an overall isolator and selected circuits fed
additionally via the RCCB. Typical circuits fed direct are lighting,
freezer, storage heating : and circuits fed via the RCCB are socket
outlets, garage circuits. This concept minimises inconvenience in
the event of fault.
Whole ring circuit
A 30mA device adjacent to the consumer unit, which provides protection for the downstairs ring circuit, provides an easy installation
with protection for all associated socket outlets. This represents the
best solution for upgrading existing installations.
Pulsating DC fault current sensitive

Increasingly, semi-conductors are also extensively used in computers, VDUs, printers, plotters,... all of which may be fed from the lain
electrical supply. The presence of semi - conductors may result in
the normal sinusoidal AC waveform being modified. For example,
the waveform may be rectifed or, as in asymmetric phase control
devices, the waveform may be chopped. The resulting waveforms
are said to have a pulsating DC component.
In the event of an earth fault occuring in equipment containing seiconductor devices, there is a probability taht the earth fault current
will contain a pulsating DC component.
Standard types of RCCB may not respond to this type of earth fault
current and the intended degree of protection will not be provided.
Check for symbol :
Hager provide a range of pulsating d.c. sensitive devices for this
type of application.
Tripping characteristics
Type
Nuisance tripping
All Hager RCCBs incorporate a filtering device preventing the risk of
nuisance tripping due to transient voltages (lightning, line disturbances on other equipment...) and transient currents (from high
capacitive circuit).
Check for the symbol :
In(A)
In(A) Standard values of break time(s) and

non-actuating time(s) at a residual current (I)
equal to :
0.5In In
2In
5In
500A
general any
0.03 no trip 0.1s
0.1s
0.04s 0.04s max.
value
break
times
> 0.03 no trip 0.3s
0.15s 0.04s 0.04s max.
break
times
Technical guide
RCCBs - domestic installation

RCCBs can be installed in two ways :
T.21
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 134
RCCB
Protection against shock outside the equipotential bonding zone
Bonding condutors are used in an installation to maintain metallic
parts, as near as possible, to the same potential as earth.
Working with portable equipment outside this equipotential bonding
zone, e.g. in the car park of a factory, introduces
additional shock hazards. Socket outlets rated 32A or less which ay
be reasonably expected to supply portable
equipment for use outdoors should have at least one socket nominated for outdoor use. This socket should be equipped with RCC
protection unless fed from an isolating transformer or similar device,
or fed from a reduced voltage.
Protection in special situations (IEE wiring regulation)
The use of RCCBs is obligatory or recommended in the following situations :
The provision of residual current protetion throughout a system or in

vulnerable parts of a system will greatly reduce the hazard of fire
caused by such faults.
PEN conductors
The use of RCCBs is PEN conductors is prohibited. A PEN conductor is a single conductor combining the functions of neutral conductor and protective conductor. This being so, when the PEN conductor is taken through the torroid of an RCCB, earth faults will go
undetected because the return path for the earth fault current is
included in the resiual sum.
Use of Hager RCCBs on 3 phase 3 wire systems
The Hager range of 4 pole RCCBs can be used to provide residual
current protection of 3 phase, 3 wire circuits (no neutral).
L1
1
- Caravans : 30mA RCCBs should be used
N
3
7 N
L1
L2
L3
7 N
8 N
- TT systems
- Swimming pools : 30mA RCCB for socket outlets in zone B
obligatory; recommended in zone C.
2
L1
- Agricultural and horticultural : 30mA RCCB for socket outlets and

for the purpose of protection against fire, RCCB 0.5A sensitivity.
8 N
N
L1 L2 L3
Supply entry
Top or bottom feed.
- Construction sites : 30mA RCCB recommended

RCCBs /MCBs co-ordination
Portable equipment
With the exception mentioned above, where a socket is specifically
designated for work outside the equipotential bonding zone, the
Wiring Regulations demand the use of RCCBs to protect the users of
portable equipment. It is widely recognised that their use has made a
significant contribution to safety in the workplace and the home.
Protection against fire hazards

The provisions in the Wiring Regulations for protection against shock
by indirect contact ensure rapid disconnection under earth fault
assuming the fault has negligible impedance. Under such conditions
the fault current, as we have seen, is
sufficiently great to cause the overcurrent protection device to quickly disconnect the fault. However high impedance faults can arise
where the fault current is sufficient to cause
considerable local heat without being high enough to cause tripping
of the overcurrent protective device. The heat
generated at the point of the fault may initiate a fire long before the
fault has deteriorated into a low impedance connection to earth.
Positive contact indication
OFF
ON
green
red
RCCBs
2 poles
16A
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
4 poles
16A
25A
40A
63A
80A
100A
with MCBs
MY
MT/MU
1-63A
2-63A
C
B/C
NB
6-100A
B
NC
0.5-100A
C
ND
6-63A
D
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
4.5kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
10kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
6kA
TEST : test regularly : RCCB must trip.
Test
Test
Earth leakage fault indication

or
Test
Test
grey
T.22
Tes
OFF
yellow
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 135
Technical information motor starters

- Electrical supply : 230/400V
- Ambient temperature range : 25C to +55C
- Working life : 100 000 operations AC-3
- Maximum of 40 operations/hour
- Tropicalized for all climates
- Connection with clamp type, terminals connection capacity :
2
2
Flexible : 1.0 mm to 4 mm
2
2
Rigid :
1.5 mm to 3 mm
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
MM
Electrical connection single phase

Ph
N
501N
502N
503N
504N
505N
506N
507N
508N
509N
510N
511N
512N
513N
230V
400V
150kA
150kA
230/400V
+ spare cartridge
fuses aM/gl
150kA
50kA
50kA
50kA
Nominal breaking capacity > short circuit current : fuses are not
necessary, if nominal breaking capacity < short circuit current : fuses
must be used, breaking capacity of association is 80kA (with BS 88
fuses)
M
2
Time/current characteristics
Under voltage release (no volt coil)
7200
1200
MZ 528N
230V~
600
MZ 529N
400V~
300
Auxiliary contact (mounted inside starter)
120
time in seconds
60
40
MZ 520N
2A - 400V~
3.5A - 230V~
20
10
5
2
Alarm contact (mounted inside starter)
MZ 527N
2A - 400V~
3,5A - 230V~
0,2
0,05
0,02
0,005
0,002
1
1,5
multiples of In
10
15
20
30
14
Technical guide
1
OFF
Clic !
Clic !
T.23
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 136
SPDs
Installation example
D.B.
500 mA
S F
telephone line
L1
C1
32 A max.
SPN 208S
SPN 408S
SPN 504
SPN 505
General SPD
with plug on
cartridge
Sensitive equipment
Very sensitive equipment class I or class II
Some installation rules for SPDs

- General SPD protects the whole installation by diverting the
lightning current to the earth. Fitted in directly dowstream the type
S differential function or delayed for system TT and TN-S.
Note. : When SPD is fitted downstream of RCD, the system

should preferably be selectif (with time delay) to avoid nuisant tripping.
- The cable length L1 must be reduced to less than 0,5m

- The resistance of the earth connection must be weakest possible
(approx. 10 ) and only one is requested by installation,
- SPDs SPN 208 and SPN 408S protect very sensitive devices of
class I and class II.
- A cable length of at least 1m is requested between general and
secondary SPD to ensure a minimum impedance in order to avoid
the simultaneous bringing into conduction of both SPDs,
- SPDs SPN 504 and SPN 505 protect analog or digital telephone
lines from very sensitive receivers.
Choice of disconnection device
Distressing of SPD
The choosen device is an MCB
Selection chart for disconnection device according to the SPD

type
General SPD
C1 (1)
Successive discharging of current due to lightning reduces progressively the performance of SPDs, with the consequence of a possible
short circuit for the installation.
For this reason, all our SPDs are fitted with an automatic thermic and
dynamic disconnection device LED on front indicates the good
working of the device :
- For normal version :
Green = OK
Red = replacement
- For version with reserve indicator :
Green = OK
Yellow = caution
SPN 165P
SPN 265R
SPN 465R
SPN 140C - SPD 140D
SPN 240R - SPD 240D
SPN 440R - SPD 440D
SPN 215R - SPD 215D
SPN 415R - SPD 415D
32 A curve C
- For version with electric LED for SPDs for fine protection
Green = OK
LED off = replacement
32 A curve C
32 A curve C
(1) The breaking capacity of MCB must be choosen according to the

short circuit intensity at the head of the installation and according to
the number of poles (1,2 or 4)
T.24
Red = replacement
Warranty
Warranty can not be applied for SPDs as their life expectancy
depends on the perturbation level absorbed to protect the electric
installation.
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 137

Keying system for fitting of neutral and phase cartridge
Presentation of 1 pole and multi pole SPDs :

Available in two versions :
- Base with an auxiliay contact and cartridges with reserve indicator
- Base without auxiliary contact and cartridges with end of life LED
Neutral plug in cartridges can not be fitted in slots for phase

cartridges and visa versa
On the front of the cartridge, a mechanical LED indicates the state of

SPD
Auxiliary contact
With reserve indicator
Base
End of live LED
Reserve
indicator
End of life
LED
Plug in
cartrige
OK
Auxiliary contact for signalling and remote monitoring

11
11
14
14
12
12
12
14
Auxiliary contact
connection capacity
mini
maxi
Remote signalling
voltage
ominal current
0,5 mm
2
1.5 mm
230 V
1A
250 V ...
0,1 A
11
2 poles or
4 poles base
Connection diagrams
Single pole SPDs : SPN1xx - SPD1xx
Protection only in common mode
Multi pole SPDs : SPN2xx - SPN4xx - SPD2xx - SPD4xx

protection is assured in both common and differential modes without adding
devices
IT / TN-C
TT / TN-S
L1
L2
L1
L3
L2
L3
L
d1
Technical guide
d1
d1 50 cm
d1 + d2 50 cm
PE
d2
PEN
PE
PEN
T.25
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 138

Technical characteristics of single pole SPDs
References
SPN 140C
SPD 140D
Installation exposure level (risk
medium
medium
Installation of SPDs
in parallel
in parallel
Nominal voltage Un
frequency
230 V
50/60 Hz
230 V
50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc
440 V
275 V
Voltage protection level Up
2 kV
1,2 kV
Discharge current capacity nominal current In

8/20 s wave
max. current Imax
15 kA
40 kA
15 kA
40 kA
Degree of protection
IP 20
IP 20
Short circuit resistance Icc (MCB - curve C)
20 kA - 32 A
20 kA - 32 A
Temperature
-20C to +60C -20C to +60C

-40C to +70C -40C to +70C
working
storage
yes
yes
Reserve indicator + auxiliary contact
Domestic building
yes
yes
yes
yes
End of live LED
collective/individual
industrial/commercial
Earthing systems
Max. connection capacity
(Ph, N, E)
IT, TN-C
flexible
rigid
screw head
IT, TN-C
2
25 mm2
35 mm
25 mm
2
35 mm
PZ2
PZ2
Technical characteristics of multipole SPDs

References
SPN 265R-SPN 465R SPN 240R, SPN 440R SPN 215R, SPN 415R
SPD 240D, SPD 440D SPD 215D, SPD 415D
Installation exposure level (risk)
very high
medium
low
in parallel
in parallel
in parallel
Nominal voltage Un
frequency
230/400 V
50/60 Hz
230/400 V
50/60 Hz
230/400 V
50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating

voltage Uc
Phase / Neutral
Neutral / PE
275 V
255 V
275 V
255 V
275 V
255 V
Protection mode
common
differential
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
1,5 kV
1,2 kV
1,0 kV
20 kA
65 kA
15 kA
40 kA
5 kA
15 kA
20 kA - 32 A
10 kA - 32 A

Discharge current capacity
8/20 s wave
nominal current In
maxial current Imax
Short circuit resistance Icc
IP 20
(MCB - curve C)
Working temperature
20 kA - 32 A
-40C +60C
End of life LED
Reserve indicator + auxiliary contact
SPN 265R - SPN 465R SPN 240R - SPN 440R SPN 215R - SPN 415R
Domestic buildings
collective / individual
industrial / commercial
Earthing systems
Connection capacity
(Ph, N, E)
Screw head
T.26
SPN 240D - SPN 440D SPN 215D - SPN 415D
yes
yes
TT
TN - S
flexible
rigid
TT
TN - S
2
25 mm
2
35 mm
PZ2
TT
TN - S
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 139

Technical characteristics of secondary SPDs (fine protection)
References
SPN 208
SPN 408S
Installation exposure level (risk)
low
low
in parallel
in parallel
Nominal voltage Un
frequency
230 V
50/60 Hz
230/400 V
50/60 Hz
Max. continuous operating voltage Uc between N / PE

between Phase and Neutral
255 V
255 V
255 V
255 V
Protection mode
yes
yes
yes
yes
1,5 kV
1,0 kV
2 kA
8 kA
2 kA
8 kA
IP 20
IP 20
common
differential

Discharge current capacity
8/20 s wave
nominal current In
maximal current Imax
Short ciruit resistance Icc (with fuse or associated MCB)
6 kA - 16 A
6 kA - 32 A
Temperature
-25C to +40C
-25C to +60C
-25C to +40C
-25C to +40C
green LED
green LED
yes
yes
yes
yes
TT, IT,
TN - S
TT, IT,
TN - S
working
storage
Well functioning indicator

Domestic buildings
collective / individual
industrial / commercial
Earthing systems
Connection capacity
(Ph, N, E)
flexible min./max.
rigid min./max.
2,5/6 mm
2
6/10 mm
Screw head
2,5/6 mm
2
6/10 mm
PZ1
SPDs SPN 208S and SPN 408S

N
25 A (max)
SP208S
Coordination : between main SPD and secondary level SPDs, this

coordination allows to reduce the protection level Up to < 800 V
L1 L2 L3
32 A
25 A (max)
N
N
L1 L2 L3
OK
25 A (max)
Technical guide
SPN 408S
SP208S
T.27
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 140
FCS/LBS
Box size
HxWxD
1
250 x 200 x 150
2
300 x 250 x 150
4
400 x 375 x 200
6
500 x 375 x 200
7
650 x 500 x 300
8
1058 x 750 x 300
Rating
New ref
enclosed ( standard version)
Dimension
A
B
20A
20A
32A
32A
63A
63A
100A
100A
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
JAB
302S
402S
303S
403S
306S
406S
310S
410S
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
105
150
105
150
105
150
150
150
180
200
180
200
180
200
200
200
182
182
182
182
182
182
182
182
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
172
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
125A
125A
160A
160A
JAC
JAC
JAC
JAC
312S
412S
316S
416S
300
300
300
300
150
150
150
150
250
250
250
250
232
232
232
232
140
140
140
140
192
192
192
192
60
60
60
60
200A
200A
250A
250A
JAE
JAE
JAE
JAE
320S
420S
325S
425S
400
400
400
400
200
200
200
200
375
375
375
375
357
357
357
357
265
265
265
265
292
292
292
292
60
60
60
60
315A
315A
400A
400A
JAG
JAG
JAG
JAG
331S
431S
340S
440S
500
500
500
500
200
200
200
200
375
375
375
375
357
357
357
357
265
265
265
265
380
380
380
380
60
60
60
60
630A
630A
800A
800A
JAH
JAH
JAH
JAH
363S
463S
380S
480S
650
650
650
650
300
300
300
300
500
500
500
500
481.5
481.5
481.5
481.5
390
390
390
390
529
529
529
529
60
60
82.5
82.5
1058
300
750
732
320+320
937
65
1250A
JAH 390S
T.28
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 141
Control relays
ReferencesEU 100
Function
EU 101
single phase
compressor
control relay
No
LCD indicator
Power supply
EU 301
single phase
compressor
control relay
EU 302
three phase
compressor
control relay
EU 300
three phase
voltage
control relay
EU 102
phase
control relay
230 V AC +10% -15%

230 V AC +10% -15%
50/60Hz +/-2%
50/60Hz +/-2%
< 5 VA
8A - AC1 - 250V
closed : normal status opened : default status
5min / 10min
200 ms
0,1..12s
200 ms
set via
potentiometer
Monitoring function
Monitor. funct.
over/under voltage
under voltage
loss of phase
Umin :
Umin/Umax :
Umin :
Asymmetry
0.75Un
+/-5% to +/-20%Un
+/-5 to
+/-5%
Umax :
set via
+/-20% Un
to +/-20%
1.2Un
potentiometer
Umax :
Umin : 0.70Un
1.15Un
Power consumption
Output contact
Disconnection time
Response time
Monitoring function
Monitoring levels
Hysteresis
Latching function
Supervised voltage
Width
LED power supply :
green
LED default
information : red
LED asymmetry
information : yellow
Ik
IP rating
Working temperature
Storage temperature
Connexion flexible
rigid
No
the power supply
2 modules
lights when powered
Yes
No
EU 103
voltage
current
control relay
control relay
with LCD
with LCD
measured
measured
votlage
current
230 V AC +10% -15%
50/60Hz +/-2%
200 ms
over voltage over current

under voltage under current
band
band
DC :
DC :
15V to 700V
0.1 to 10A
AC :
AC :
15V rms
direct : 0.1to10A or via
to 480V rms
current
transformer : X/5
5 to 50%
Yes
2 modules
lights in case of fault, flashing during time elapses, off during normal status
asymetry
fault
3
IP 20
-20 to +55C
-40 to +70C
0.75 to 4 mm2
1.00 to 6 mm2
Air conditioning control relay single phase EU 100
L
N
1,2 Un
Un
0,75 Un
EU 100
Def
On
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
2 Def
10
1 On
Technical guide
T.29
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 142
Control relays
Voltage control relay single phase EU 102
L
N
Up
Up - Hys
u 15...700 VDC
Lo + Hys
Lo
0
9
Memo OFF
set / reset
2 Def
reset memo
Memo ON
EU 102
select
def
10
reset memo
2 Def
Current control relay single phase EU 103

Up
Up - Hys
L
N
Lo + Hys
i 0,1...10A
Lo
Memo OFF
2 Def
Memo ON
reset memo
set / reset
select
EU 103
def
10
reset memo
2 Def
1 On
Phase control relay EU 300
L3
L2
L1
L1
L2
L3
100%
0%
100%
100%
0%
EU 300
10
Asy
5
Def
On
15
20
3 Asy
10
2 Def
1 ON
T.30
L3
L2
L2
L3
0%
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 143
Control relays
Air conditioning control relay single phase EU 101
L
N
Un + u
Un
4
Un - u
EU 101
10 mn
10
5 mn
Def
On
15
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
20
2 Def
10
1 On
Air conditioning control relay three phase EU 301
L3
L2
L1
Un + u
Un
Un - u
EU 301
10 mn
10
5 mn
Def
On
15
20
2 Def
10
1 On
Voltage control relay three phase EU 302
L3
L2
L1
Up = 1,15Un
Up - 1%Up
Lo + 1%Lo
Lo = Un - u
level (%)
On
10
Off
Def
On
20
0,1
12
2 Def
reset memo
5
4
15
time (s)
Technical guide
EU 302
10
Memo ON
Memo OFF
reset memo
2 Def
1 On
T.31
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 144
2/25/09
2:00 PM
Page 145
Automation devices
T.34
T.36
T.39
Latching relays - Auxiliaries for latching relays

Choice of contactors
Technical data - Analogue time switches
Analog. time switches 72 x 72 mm
- Digital time switches
T.42
T.43
T.45
T.46
T.47
T.48
T.49
T.51
T.53
T.56
T.57
T.64
T.65
Electronic switch clocks

Delay timers
Time lag switches
Transformers
EK 186 multi-range thermostat
EK 187 multi-setting thermostat
EK 081 - EK 082 - EK 083 probes
Voltmeters, ammeters, current transformers multimeter
Kilowatt hour meters
Technical data - twilight switches
Dimmers
Two-channels twilight switches
Telephone remote control
Technical guide
T.33
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 146
Latching relays
Technical characteristics
Coil in AC
voltage rating
tolerance
frequency
start consumption
Coil in DC
voltage rating
tolerance
start consumption
Contacts
max. perm. Current AC1
voltage
electrical endurance
mechanical endurance
ohmic loss per current path
minimum duration of impulse
maximum time under voltage
pushbutton with signal lamp
without condensator
ingress protection
working temperature
storage temperature
Connection
flexible
rigid
EPN 510 EPN516

EPN 515 EPN523
EPN 520
EPN 501 EPN 513 EPN 511 EPN512

EPN 503 EPN 518 EPN 519 EPN522
EPN 526 EPN 524 EPN 521
EPN 525 EPN 548 EPN 528

EPN 540
EPN 541
EPN 546
230V
110V
+10/-20%
50Hz
25VA
48V
230V
110V
48V
+10/-20%
12VA
24V
24V
12V
8V
48V
24V
24V
12V
55VA
12V
110V
25VA
16A
250V AC
150 000 operations
500 000 operations
1.2W
50 ms
1H
400V AC
6 (1mA / lamp)
IP20
-5 to +40C
-40 to +80C
2
6 mm
2
10 mm
condensator parrallel with the coil
Incandescent lamps 230V

with and without halogen
Incandescent lamps
Low voltage halogen
Fluorescent lamps
Uncompensated
Fluorescent lamps
Parrallel compensation
Two lamps circuit
series compensation
Two lamp circuit with electronics power supply units

Fluo compact
uncompensated
Fluo compact electronic
power supply unit
High intensity discharge
metal halogen lamps,
uncompensated
Metal halogen lamps,
parrallel compensation
High pressure sodium vapour
lamps, uncompensated
High pressure sodium vapour
lamps, parrallel compensated
T.34
load
number
load
number
load
number
load
number
C total max(a)
load
number
C
load
number
load
number
load
number
load
number
40W
45
20W
70
15W
29
15W
27
121F
2x18W
40
2.7F
18W
30
2x18W
15
7W
50
11W
80
60W
30
50W
28
18W
25
18W
27
121F
2x20W
40
2.7F
36W
28
2x36W
13
10W
45
15W
60
75W
24
75W
19
30W
25
30W
25
112F
2x36W
22
3.4F
58W
15
2x58W
8
18W
40
20W
50
100W
15
100W
14
36W
24
36W
25
112F
2x40W
22
3.4F
load
number
load
number
C total max(a)
load
number
load
number
C total max(a)
50W
11
50W
9
63F
70W
9
70W
5
60F
80W
9
80W
8
58F
150W
5
150W
3
54F
125W
7
125W
6
60F
250W
3
250W
2
64F
250W
3
250W
3
54F
400W
2
400W
1
50F
150W
12
150W
9
58W
14
58W
16
112F
2x58W
12
5.3F
26W
25
23W
40
400W
2
400W
2
50F
200W 300W 500W

9
5
3
300W
3
2x65W
12
5.3mF
(a) : these values must not be

exceeded
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 147
Auxiliaries for latching relays

Auxiliaries for latching relays
EPN 050
voltage rating
(a)
24 to 230V AC
nominal load 2A/250V AC
lmin/230V AC 15mA
working temperature
-5 to +40C
storage temperature
-40 to 80C
2
Connections : flexible 6 mm
2
rigid
10 mm
Installation of the auxiliaries

EPN051 EPN 052 - EPN 053
(a)
24 to 230V AC
-
3
1
(a) : according to a latching relay connected with an auxiliary
4
3
Application diagram
centralised command (EPN 050 - EPN 052)
N
OFF
general
centralised
command
ON
EPN 052
local
command
local
command
EPN 050
local
command
EPN 050
EPN 050
33
local
command
EPN 050
33
31
11
11
A1
A2
32
14
14
34
12
12
31
A1
A2
ON
11
A1
A2
32
14
14
34
12
12
OFF
group
centralised
command
Remote signalling (EPN 051)
11
A1
A2
ON
EPN 052
OFF
group
centralised
command
Maintained command (EPN 053)
23
11
21
A1
A2
A1
A2
24
Technical guide
12
22
14
T.35
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 148
Heating
The choice of the contactor depends on the mechanical resistance
(number of operations) and on the electrical heating load
i.e. resistive elements, infra-red element, convectors.
The choice of contactor is dependant upon many parameters
i.e. operating voltage, size of contacts, number of operations,
ambient temperature, type of load supplied etc.
Type of load
Loads are categorised into various AC ratings, (AC1, AC2, AC3 etc.)
and the higher the AC rating the more inductive the load becomes.
All Hager contactor ratings are given at AC1, therefore they must be
de-rated if used on other types of AC load.
Heat dissipation inserts
The ambient temperature around a contactor can affect its life
expectancy, therefore, we strongly recommend that heat dissipation
inserts (LZ 060) are fitted between all contactors and adjacent
devices.
Please consult us, if you require help selecting a suitable
contactor.
Single phase
Three phase
U
U
R
U
Number of operations
Maximum load*
in kW
50 000
4,4
7,8
12
12
23,2
35
100 000
4,4
5,9
8,8
10,5
17,7
26,3
150 000
3,9
5
7,7
8,5
15
23
* On three phase configuration the maximum load per phase

corresponds to the values states divided by 3.
Motors (AC3)
Single phase 230V
L1
Maximum load
in kW
Single phase with

capacitor
230V
1.1
2.2
Three phase
(AC3 cat.)
400V
4
7.5
15
Requirements of use influence of working temperature:

derating factor between 40C and 50C : 0.9
example: heating with convector
the maximum load of ES 220 is 4.4kW for 50 000 operations
and for a temperature <40C.
between 40C and 50C, the load is 4.4 x 0.9 i.e. 3.96kW
T.36
300 000
2,9
3,7
5,9
5,8
10,8
5,8
single phase 230V

ES 220 - ES 230
ES 240
ES 263
three phase*400V
ES 320 - ES 430
ES 340
ES 463
example:
function of a heating installation 200 days/annum, 100 operations
per day (1 opening + 1 closing = 2 operations)
mechanical life = 10 years
total number of operations: 200 x 100 x 10 = 200,000
in that case select an ES 240 to control a load of 4.4 kW
(single phase 230V)
Three phase 400V

U
M
L2
200 000
3,5
4,4
6,6
6,5
13,1
19,7
L1
L2
L3
Choice of contactor according

to control diagram
2 wires
3 wires
ES 220
ES 240
ES 320 - ES 420
ES 340 - ES 345 - ES 440
ES 365 - ES 463
Close fitting:
it is necessary to put a heat dissipation insert (reference LZ 060)
between each contactor.
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 149
Lighting :
A contactor can control a maximum number of lights as per the
table below.
16 A
25 A
40 A
63 A
40 W
60 W
75 W
100 W
150 W
200 W
300 W
500 W
1000 W
45
30
24
18
12
9
5
3
1
50
35
28
21
14
10
6
4
2
100
75
65
45
33
25
16
10
5
120
105
90
65
45
35
23
14
7
20 W
50 W
75 W
100 W
150 W
70
28
19
14
9
80
40
26
20
13
160
80
52
40
26
240
120
78
60
39
15
18
30
36
58
W
W
W
W
W
29
25
25
24
14
50
42
35
30
20
110
80
70
60
40
150
130
110
90
60
15
18
30
36
58
W
W
W
W
W
25
25
20
20
15
two lamps circuits, series compensation
2
2
2
2
2
2
18
20
36
40
58
65
electronics power supply units
18 W
36 W
58 W
Lamp type
Incandescent lamps
230V lamps with and without
halogen
low voltage halogen
Fluorescent lamps
uncompensated
parallel compensation
F
F
F
F
F
F
45
45
40
40
22
Cmax.
202
202
180
180
99
60
60
55
55
40
90
90
50
50
23
23
140
140
100
100
50
50
30
26
15
35
30
17
60
32
25
80
45
30
two lamps circuits with electronics power 2 x 18 W

2 x 36 W
supply units
2 x 58 W
15
13
8
17
15
9
30
16
12
40
22
15
fluo compact uncompensated
7W
10 W
18 W
26 W
50
45
40
25
55
50
42
27
100
90
65
50
130
115
90
80
fluo compact electronic power

supply unit
11
15
20
23
80
60
50
40
85
63
52
42
110
100
70
60
150
130
110
100
50 W
80 W
125 W
250 W
400 W
11
9
7
3
1
12
10
8
3
2
36
27
19
10
7
50
38
26
14
10
50 W
80 W
125 W
250 W
400 W
9
7
5
3
1
70 W
150 W
250 W
400 W
9
5
3
1
70 W
150 W
250 W
400 W
5
3
1
1
metal halogen lamps, parrallel

compensation
high pressure sodium vapour lamps,

uncompensated
high pressure sodium vapour lamps,

parrallel compensated
2,7
2,7
3,4
3,4
5,3
5,3
Cmax.
135
135
112
112
76
45
45
26
26
13
13
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
30
30
25
25
17
40
40
22
22
12
12
High intensity discharge

metal halogen lamps, uncompensated
x
x
x
x
x
x
Cmax.
112
112
90
90
67
Cmax.
63 F
49 F
50 F
54 F
25 F
10
8
6
3
2
Cmax.
70 F
56 F
60 F
54 F
50 F
10
6
4
2
Cmax.
60 F
54 F
32 F
/
6
3
2
1
25
21
14
7
4
Cmax.
175 F
147 F
140 F
126 F
100 F
20
10
6
4
Cmax.
72 F
54 F
64 F
50 F
15
9
5
3
30
25
17
9
6
Cmax.
270
270
247
247
180
C max.
210 F
175 F
170 F
162 F
150 F
30
15
10
6
Cmax.
180 F
162 F
160 F
150 F
20
16
7
5
Cmax.
240 F
198 F
224 F
250 F
T.37
Technical guide
Choice of contactors :
The choice of the contactor depends on the type of load
(lighting etc.) and on the requirements (number of operations,
working temperature).
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 150
Technical characteristics
Contactors
ES 110 ES 320 ES 240 ES 263
ES 210 ES 420 ES 340 ES 365
ES 220 ES 430 ES 345 ES 463
ES 230 ES 320A ES 440 ES 470
ES 237 ES 420A ES 480 ES 490
ES 110A ES 430A
ES 220A ES 450
ES 230A
Command
voltage (V)
230
230
230
230
Frequency
% +10/-15 for all products
Hz 50/60Hz
Starting
consumption (VA) 15
20
50
50
Maintained
consumption (VA) 5
5
7
7
Max perm.
current AC1
(A) 25
25
40
63
Insulation
voltage (V)
250 400
400
400
400
Mech. endur. (%) 1 000 000 for all products
Working temp. (C) -10/+50 for all products
Storage temp. (C) -40/+80 for all products
Connection
2
2
control flexible
0.5 to 4 mm
1 to 2.5 mm
2
2
rigid
1 to 6 mm
1.5 to 4 mm
2
power
flexible
1 to 6 mm
2
2
rigid
1.5 to 10 mm
4 to 25 mm
Relays
Interface relays
ES 224 ES 424 ES 252 ES 262 ER 120 ER 123 ER 124 EN 146 EN 145
ES 224A ES 424A ES 442 ES 462 ER 135 ER 138 ER 139
ES 239 ES 242
ES 492
24
24
24
24
230
24
12
230
10 to 26
15
20
50
50
15/20
15/20
15/20
(a)
(a)
25
25
40
63
16
16
16
250
400
400
250
250
250
250
250
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
to
to
to
to
4 mm
2
6 mm
2
6 mm
2
10 mm
1.0 to 2.5 mm
2
1.5 to 4.0 mm
2
4.0 to 25 mm
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
to
to
to
to
4 mm
2
6 mm
2
6 mm
2
10 mm
Note : (a) electrical endurance of EN 145 and EN 146 = 200 000 operations at AC1
Consumption EN 145
control
start and maintained
voltage
consumption
12V DC
0.5W
24V DC
1.5W
12V AC
1VA
24V AC
2VA
Auxiliary contacts
auxiliary contacts are available for
the range of relays and
25A contactors.
relays and 25A contactors with manual override

1. permanent on
2. automatic
3. permanent off
1
I
Auto
T.38
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 151
Technical data
Width in I 17.5mm
EH 010
EH 011
EH209
EH210
EH211
EH271
EH 110
EH 111
EH 171
EH 191
Weekly
Daily+Weekly
Version
Daily
Weekly
Voltage supply
230V +10/-10%
110/230V
230V
Frequency
110/230V
230V +10/-10%
50/60Hz
Consumption
0.5VA
Output
1NO
1 changeover
Switching capacity
AC1
16A / 250V
Inductive load (cos phi = 0.6)
4A / 250V
3A / 250V
Incandescent lamps
900W
Characteristics
Technology
Quartz
Dial
24 hours
Min. switching
15 min
7 days
30 min
Max. number of switching
3hrs 30min 30 min
24 hours
7 days
24 hrs. /7days
15 min
2 hours
15min/ 2hrs
84
96/84
96
Accuracy
+/- 1 sec per day
Supply failure reserve
200 hrs
200 hrs
200 hrs
Reached in
120 hrs
120 hrs
120 hrs
Manual override
auto / on
auto / on / off
Environment
Protection degree
IP20
Working temperature
-10 to +55C
Storage temperature
-10 to +55C
2
Connection
0.5 to 4 mm
1.5 to 6 mm
0.5 to 4 mm
Ph
N
1 2 3 4 5 6
EH 110 Electrical connections
Simple time setting and programming using dual direction dial
Ph
N
EH 010, EH 011
electrical connections
Technical guide
EH010
EH011
Programming by captive segments
T.39
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 152
Technical data
Analogue time switches 72 x 72 mm
EH 710
72x72x48
Dimensions (mm)
voltage supply
consumption
output
Switching capacity
AC1
inductive load (cos phi = 0.6)
incandescent lighting
Characteristics
technology
dial
switching dial
minimum switching
working accuracy
supply failure reserve
reached in
manual switch
Environment
working temperature
storage temperature
connection capacity
EH 711
EH 770
EH 771
230V +10/-15%
50/60Hz
0.5VA
1 changeover
EH 712
EH 715
EH 716
110V to 240V AC 50/60Hz

48V DC +10/-15%
1 N/O
1 changeover
16A/250V
3A/250V
1000W
Quartz
24h
10min
20min
+/- 1 sec per day
200 hours
120 hours
temporary ON or OFF
7 days
1 hour
2 hour
-
24h
10 min
20 min
200 hours
120 hours
200 hours
120 hours
-10 to +50C
-20 to +60C
2
1 to 6 mm
Ph
N
EH 710 Electrical connection

Very easy programming
with dual direction dial
Manual override
53
T.40
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 153
Technical data
Wall timer
Wiring diagram
Supply voltage:
120/230 V 10 % 50/60 Hz
Accuracy:
1 sec/ 24h
Contact rating:
L out
16 A/ 230V AC1
Control an incandescent halogen lamp up to 1000W, compensated

or uncompensated fluorescent lamp up to 400 W (C = 44F) and
compact fluorescent lamp up to 10 x 20 W.
Operating temperature:
0 C to + 50 C
Storage temperature:
20 C to + 60 C
insulation class:
II
Protection class:
IP30
Degree of pollution:
standard
EH810
L
N
Important:
inductive (starting load) should always be calculated especially when controlling lighting (because of variable inductive
loads). If this load exceeds 8 Amps then it is imperative that
a contactor be used.
EH870
Setting the ON/OFF periods

The setting segment pins of
your timer allows you to program a variety of ON/OFF periods of your choice.
Use the 2 screws to install the

socket on the wall.
Use the 2 screws to install the

socket on the wall.
x2
Connection
L:
Phase
N:
Neutral
L out : Phase output
to appliance
Time setting
Turn the dial in the direction of
the arrows (clockwise) until the
correct time of day is exactly
opposite time set marker.
Installation
Installation should be made by a
qualified electrician in accordance with the current regulations.
Proceed to install as follows; disconnect from mains supply!
Press inwards the segments on

the program disk corresponding
to the selected (ON) periods.
Example of daily programming :
ON = from 10.00 pm to 6.00 am.
x2
Connection
L:
N:
L out :
Setting the ON/OFF periods

The setting segment pins of your
timer allows you to program a
variety of ON/OFF periods of
your choice.
Phase
Neutral
Phase output
to appliance
Manual override
A slider switch allows the unit to
be set for continuously ON/OFF
in addition to the program setting:
ON
==> permanently ON
OFF
==> permanently OFF
AUTO ==> switching

programmed as set
on dial
Time setting
Turn the dial in the direction of
the arrows (clockwise) until the
correct time of day is exactly
opposite time set marker.
Day
Day
Day
Day
Day
Day
Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Press inwards the segments on

the program disk corresponding
to the selected (ON) periods.
Example of weekly programming
:ON = day 1 to day 5 :
22 h 00 ==> 6 h 00
ON = days 6 and 7 :
22 h 00 ==> 10 h 00
T.41
Technical guide
Installation
Installation should be made by a
qualified electrician in accordance with the current regulations.
Proceed to install as follows; disconnect from mains supply!
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 154
Technical data
Width in I 17.5mm
Version
Voltage supply
Consumption
Output
Switching capacity
AC1
inductive load (cos phi = 0.6)
incandescent lamps
Characteristics
Accuracy
Supply failure reserve
Manual override
Environment
Protection degree
Working temperature
Storage temperature
Connection
EG 010
1
daily
EG 110
3
230V +15/-15%
50/60Hz
EG 210
3
EG 071
1
weekly
EG 170
3
EG 171
EG 172
3 (pulsed) 3
110/230V 230V +15/-15%

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
+10/-15% +10/-15%
EG 270
3
EG 470
5
12V AC
110/230V 230V
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
+15/-15%
12V DC
+10/-15% 50/60Hz
+10/-15%
20VA
1VA
changeover contact
16A/250V
3A/250V
1000W
+/- 1 sec per day
Lithium battery total of three years
permanent permanent ON/OFF
permanent permanent ON/OFF
ON/OFF
temporary ON/OFF
ON/OFF
temporary ON/OFF
IP20
-10 to +50C
-10 to +50C
2
0.5 to 4 mm
Electrical connections
L
N
Display :
1. Time
2. Ouput contact (ON or OFF)
3. Program selected
EG 010
1
2
OFF
5
EG 010
1
Buttons :
4. To select the program to
apply
5. To scroll program steps
6. Reset
7. + and - : change time
settings
L
N
EG 170
2
1
prog
auto
manu
OFF
EG 170
Display :
1. Time
2. Circuit status (ON or OFF)
3. Day of the week (1=monday,
2= tuesday,...)
on
reset
1 2 3 4 5 6
enter
off
L
N
A,B,C,D
EG 470
OFF
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EG 470
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T.42
Buttons :
4. Mode selector : to select
one of the following modes :
- time setting
- programming
- running mode
- manual override
5. 1 to 7 : selection of the
days
6. on/off : chooses whether
the circuits is on or off.
7. + and - : changes
settings
8. enter : to confirm selection
9. reset
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 155
Electronic switch clocks

Main features
Electrical characteristics :
- Power supply : 230 V AC 15 %
- Frequency : 50/60 Hz
- Consumption : max. 6 VA at 50 Hz
- Output : one reverse contact free of potential (EG 103E)
two reverse contacts free of potential (EG 203E)
- Max cut-off power :
AC1 : 16A 250 V
DC1 : 4A 12 V ...
Cos = 0,6 : 10A 250 V
Incandescent lamps : 2300 W
Halogen lamps 230 V : 2300 W
Compensated fluorescent tubes // (max. 45F) : 400 W
Uncompensated fluorescent tubes,
Series compensated tubes : 1000 W
Compact fluo lamps : 500 W
- Min cut-off power
AC1 : 100 mA 250 V
DC1 : 100 mA 12 V ...
- Galvanic insulation between power supply and output : 4 kV
- Product is delivered with time and date preset,

/
- Automatic summer/winter time change
- Programming key :
for permanent overrides,
for program copy or backup,
- Progamming per day or group of days,
- 56 On/Off program steps
or impulses
: 1 sec at 30 mn. (EG 103E and EG 203E)
- On or Off permanent overrides ( fixed),
- On or Off temporary overrides
( flickering),
- holidays mode
: : On or Off overrides between two dates
(EG 103E and EG 203E) ,
- Simulation of presence
(EG 103E and EG 203E)
- Display bar graph of daily profile,
- Lockable keyboard
- Programmable with power off
- Back lighted screen (EG 103E and EG 203E),
- Remote temporary overrides (EG 103E).
Functional characteristics
- Programming capacity : 56 steps to be distributed over 2 channels
for EG 203E
- Min. time between 2 steps : 1 min
- Operating accuracy : 1,5 sec / 24h
- Operating power reserve : lithium battery, total of 5-year mains
power cut-off
- The product is put in idle state (display goes off) after 1 min of
power off. It returns to Auto mode as soon power is back on, or
after pressing one key.
- Protection index: IP 20
Environment
- Operating temperature
- Storage temperature
Connection by cage terminals
2
- Flexible : 1.0 to 6 mm
2
- Rgid :
1.5 to 10 mm
: -5 to +45 C
: -20 to +70 C
Product description
menu : selection of operation mode
auto : operation according to
program scheduled
prog : new for programming
prog : modification of an existing
program
: check the program
: modify date, time and mode for
changing summer/winter time /
: holidays (EG 103E and EG 203E)
2 + et - : navigation or setting of values
: in Auto mode, selection of
overrides, waivers or random
operation
(EG 103E and EG 203E)
3 ok
: validate flickering signal
information
4
: return to previous step
1
auto prog
new
modif
Off
On
0
12
18
24
2
1
ok
menu
You may return in Auto mode at any time with the menu key. The switch
is set back to Auto mode when no action occurs for one min.
Reset :
- Of program : it can be totally removed by pressing simultaneously the
three following keys :menu, ok and
. Time and date are maintained.
- Total reset : the whole product content is removed by pressing
simultaneously the keys menu, ok and .. .Following total reset,
the date and time of the switch clock must be reset.
Connection diagram
EG 103E
Ph / +
N /-
Technical guide
drogation
temporaire
1 3 5 7
EG 103E
2 4 6 8
T.43
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 156
Delay timers
EZ 001 - EZ 002 -EZ 003 - EZ 004 - EZ 005 - EZ 006
Supply voltage
A1 - A2
A1 - A2
A3 - A2
Output
Life expectancy
max load AC1
incandescent
fluorescent non comp.
inductive load 0.6pf5A / 230V~
Min power
AC
DC
Galvanic isolation
Standard / norm
Timer range
Min. command period
AC
DC
Operating temperature
working
storage
Connection capacity
flexible
rigid
24-28 Vdc (+10% - 15%) terminals A1 & A2

24-230 Vac (+10% - 15%) terminals A1 & A2
12 Vac & dc (+10% -10%) terminals A3 & A2
1 volt free C/O contact
10A / 230V~ 50,000 cycles
450W~ 100,000 cycles
600W~ 50,000 cycles
100,000 cycles
100mA at 230V
100mA at 12V
2kV
EN60669-2-1
0.1s - 10 hours
50ms
30ms
-20oC to +50oC
-40oC to +50oC
2
1.0 - 6 mm
2
1.5 - 10 mm
Connection
EZ 001, EZ 003, EZ 005, EZ 006 (command D,E,F)
EZ 002, EZ 004, EZ 006 (command A,B,C)
Ph / +
N/24V to 230V
Ph / +
N/24V to 230V
15
In
In
A1/B1
A3/B1
15
15
B1
A1
18 16
A3
15
18
A2
16
18 16
18
T.44
A2
16
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 157
Delay timers
Delay on
Delay off
EZN 001 & EZN 006 function D
EZN 002 & EZN 006 function C
command (B1)
command (B1)
T
output (15-16)
LED
LED
Adjustable time on
Impulse timer
EZN 003 & EZN 006 function E
EZN 004 & EZN 006 function A
command (B1)
command (B1)
T
output (15-16)
output (15-16)
LED
LED
Symetrical flasher
Multifunction timer
EZN 005 & EZN 006 function F
EZN 006 function A
command (B1)
command (B1)
output (15-16)
LED
Multifunction timer - 8 individual functions

A =
timer.
B =
delay off (output relay opens either at end of command or
after set time period - which ever is shorter).
C =
delay off.
D =
delay on.
E
=
delay on (output relay closes either at end of command or
after set time period - which ever is shorter).
F
=
Symetrical timer.
On selection - contact permanently closed
Off selection - contact permanently open
output (15-16)
LED
Output relay open
- with no command
Output relay open
- with command signal running
Output relay closed
- with command signal running
Output relay closed
- with command signal removed
Output relay closed (EZN 005)
Technical guide
output (15-16)
T.45
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 158
Time lag switches

Product description
EMN 001
EMN 005
Supply voltage
230V +10-15%
50 / 60 Hz
230V 15 %
50 / 60 Hz
Consumption
1 VA
1 VA
Timers
EMN 001N / EMN 005
1
8
10
6
4
Cut-off power :
- AC1
- Incandescence
- Halogen 230 V
- Ferromagnetic transformer
- Compensated parallel fluorescent
- Serie cmpensated fluorescent
- Electronic transformer
- Fluorescent compact with ballast :
- Electronic
- Traditional
16 A 250 V
2300 W
2300 W
1600 W
Cap 112F, 1000W
3600 W
2300 W
16 A 250 V
2300 W
2300 W
1600 W
Cap 112F, 1000W
3600 W
2300 W
460 W
2300 W
460 W
2300 W
30 s to 10 min.
100 mA
30 s to 10 mn/1h
100 mA
2
2 min
override lever ON or time

delayed
time setting potentiometer
Time delay
Quiescent current (max)
Environment
Storage temperature
-10 to +55C
-20 to +60C
Connection
2
Flexible
Rigid
1.0 to 6 mm 2
1.5 to 10 mm
1.0 to 6 mm 2
1.5 to 10 mm
Timer/notice bridging
Two 1,5 wires
Two 1,5 wires
Electrical connections
3-Wire diagram
EMN 001N/EMN005
4-Wire diagram
Corridor
Ph
N
10
6
4
L
N
2 min
Stairwell
Stairwell
EM001N
ou
EM003
3
4
Timer
Timer
N
Ph
Timer
Note : in case of high powers , put a dissipation spacer (LZ060)

between the switch-off notice and the timer.
Quiescent
current
Quiescent
current
Timer
Products EM 001N and EM 003 identify and interpret automatically

the types of connection used (3 or 4 wires).
They perform an automatic time delay cycle at the time of
switch-on.
Operation diagrams
T
EMN 001
> 3s
1h
EMN 001
Recycling
of cycle
T.46
> 3s
> 3s
Recycling of
short cycle
Switch-on of
one-hour cycle
during the short
cycle
Switch-on of
one-hour cycle
and deliberate
interruption
before cycle end
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 159
Transformers
Safety transformers
These transformers are designed to ensure personal safety, their
primary winding are electrically separated from their secondary
windings and they are intended to feed safety extra low voltage
circuits U 50V. A thermal overload, in the primary windings,
ensures that if a short circuit or an overload occurs in the output it
will not damage the device.
230 V
24 V
Bell transformers
Bell transformers are similar to safety transformers but the
secondary voltages do not exceed 24 volts, they are also similarly
protected against short circuits and overloads, by thermal protection
in the primary winding.
U2
Compliance with the standards

The bell transformers conform with EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-8.
The safey transformers conform with EN 61558-1 and EN 61558-2-8
U1
U3
Technical specification
U2
U3
No load
U2
Secondary voltage
U3
Galvanic insulation
Max functional temperature
Overload and S/C protection
ST 301
4VA
bell
230 volts
8 volts
In = 0.33A
12 volts
In = 0.5A
12 volts
18 volts
4kV
35C
thermal cut out
ST 303
ST 305
8VA
16VA
bell
bell
230 volts
230 volts
8 volts
8 volts
In = 1A
In = 2A
12 volts
12 volts
In = 0.67A
In = 1.33A
15 volts
12.4 volts
21.8 volts
18.5 volts
4kV
4kV
35C
35C
in the primary winding
ST 312
25VA
safety
230 volts
12 volts
In = 2.08A
24 volts
In = 1.04A
14 volts
29 volts
4kV
35C
ST 313
16VA
safety
230 volts
12 volts
In = 1.33A
24 volts
In = 0.67A
15.5 volts
29.7 volts
4kV
35C
ST 314
40VA
safety
230 volts
12 volts
In = 3.33A
24 volts
In = 1.67A
13.7 volts
26.5 volts
4kV
35C
ST 315
60VA
safety
230 volts
12 volts
In = 5.25A
24 volts
In = 2.63A
13.6 volts
27 volts
4kV
35C
Technical guide
Reference
Nominal power
Designation
Primary voltage
Secondary voltage
T.47
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 160
Push buttons and indicators lights

Electrical and mechanical characteristics
General features
Marque
Part number
Designation
Hager
SVN1...
Indicator lights
Standard
Light technology
IEC62094-1
LED light
Rated insulation voltage
Rated imnpulse withstand voltage
Operational voltage
Frequency
Operational thermal current
Operational current @ 230V AC 12
Operational current @ 230V AC 14
LED power
Conditional short circuit current

IP class
Degree of pollution
Connecting
Type of connection
Connection capacity with flexible calbe
Connection capacity withy rigid cable
Terminal tightening torque
Case material
Mechanical characteristics
Electric endurance in number of cycles
Mechanical endurance in no. of operations
Life time
Storage temperature
Climat environment
Protection index IP
Height
SVN3...
Push buttons
IEC60947-5-1
250V
4kV (2kV for 12-48V version)
4kV
230VAC (1)
50/60Hz
n/a
n/a
n/a
0.8W (230V) 0.33W (48V) 0.8W (24V)
3.45mA (230V) 6.9mA (48V) 3.3mA (24V)
n/a
16A
16A
10A
9.7mA (48DC) 4.6mA (24DC)
2.1mA (12VDC)
1000A with gl 10A fuse
IP2X
3
Cage terminals
0.75mm2 to 6mm2
0.75mm2 to 10mm2
Mini: 1.3Nm; Max 2Nm: advised 1.65Nm rigid and 1.8Nm supple
Thermoplastic (Polyamide) comply with IEC 695-2-2
n/a
n/a
100000h
Installation
Mounting
Mounting position
(1) Except 12 to 48V indicator light (SVN131 and SVN132)
T.48
SVN4...
Indicator lights
+ Push buttons
Indicator lights Pushbuttons
15000 (AC12); 6000 (AC 14)

15000
-20 to +50C
-40 to +80C
all climnates
20
2000m
DIN rail EN50.022-35

Performances not affected if installed
vertically, horizontally or flat
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 161
EK 186 multi-range thermostat

Main characteristics
- voltage supply: 230V + 10 - 15% 50/60 Hz
- consumption: 1.5VA
- output: 1 changeover contact
2A 230V AC1
- 4 temperature ranges :
-30 to 0C
0 to +30C
+30 to +60C
+60 to +90C
- varying accuracy
Environment
- working temperature: 10 to +50C
- storage temperature: 20 to +70C
Connection capacity
- flexible: 1.0 to 6 mm2
- rigid: 1.5 to 10 mm2
- probe: maximum distance 50m
Multiple applications
a single device to solve all your problems of regulation or
temperature control, from cold room to incubator.
Varying accuracy
the accuracy can be adapted according to the application.
e.g.: low for ambient temperature regulation, high for incubator
regulation.
Safety feature for probe failure
to protect the installation in case of disconnection from the
probe.various connections can be made so the thermostat will be
- permanent OFF
- permanent ON
- cyclical operation: output ON 1 minute in every 4.
Display
of state of output.
4
15
10
5
1
2
3
4
-30
20
25
0
30
30
90
60
1 3 5 7 9
EK 186
EK 186
2 4 6 8 10
1
2
3
4
selection of the temperature range.

adjustment of the temperature setting.
selection of accuracy.
display of state of output.
Working principle
the EK 186 regulates the temperature according to all or nothing
principle, it can be associated with different probes, according to the
application the accuracy is a function of the temperature
range and is selected by a slide switch.
EK 081
EK 083
Choice of the safety feature for probe failure

EK 186
2 4 6 8 10
Example of choice of accuracy

- regulation of ambient temperature
range
: 0 to +30C
accuracy
: 0.18C = 2
- control of hot water outgoing circuit
range
: 30 to +60C
accuracy
: 0.53C = 3
permanent ON
e.g. coldroom to
continue to
generate cold
Without shunt
e.g. heating
to protect
installations from
frost during winter
permanent OFF
e.g. incubator to
avoid permanent
heating of
incubator
Caution
when the temperature ranges 30 to 60C and 60 to 90C are
selected and if the temperature measured by the probe is below
30C, the safety feature for probe failure must be permanent on,
until the measured temperature reaches the minimum temperature
corresponding to the range (i.e. 30C for the range 30C to 60C
and 60C for the range 60C to 90C).
T.49
Technical guide
Position on
the temperature range C
slide switch
30 to 0
0 to 30 30 to 60
60 to 90
1
2.15*
2.54
2.98
3.43
2
0.15
0.18* 0.21
0.24
3
0.38
0.45
0.53*
0.61
4
1.23
1.45
1.70
1.96*
* bold : preferential accuracies for each temperature range.
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 162
EK 187 multi-setting thermostat
T.50
2/25/09
2:01 PM
Page 163
EK 081 - EK 082 - EK 083 probes

EK083 universal probe
Associated with EK 186
10
EK 083
Associated with EK 187 - EK 618

-
To associate with EK 186 thermostat

To associate with EK 187 thermostat (for those applications insert
in series with the probe a resistance of 1500)
EK 083: 10 kOhms at 25C
cable length: 4m
Environment
- Working temperature:
- Stocking temperature:
-30 to +90C
-30 to +100C
10
R 1500
EK 083
Examples of applications
Use without the clamp collar
protected by a sheath for the control of
floor temperature
Use with the clamp collar

for the control of hot water
insulating
sheath
used as an external probe in a

weatherproof box
probe
heating
frame
hot
water
probe
Resistance of probes according to temperature

EK 083
EK 081 *
T (C)
+ 90
+ 80
+ 70
+ 50
+ 30
+ 25
+ 20
+ 15
+ 10
+ 05
+ 00
5
10
15
20
25
30
R (k)
0.91
1.25
1.75
3.60
8.06
10
12.49
15.71
19.90
25.39
32.65
42.31
55.29
72.89
96.97
130.24
176.68
R (k)
on a wall
1.25
1.75
3.60
8.06
10
12.49
15.71
19.90
25.39
32.65
EK 081 **
EK 082
R (k)
2.83
3.33
5.18
9.64
11.58
14.07
17.28
21.48
26.98
34.23
Technical guide
Temperature
face value at 25C

Note: *association with EK 186
**association with EK 187 and EK 618
T.51
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 164
EK 081 - EK 082 - EK 083 probes

EK 081 fixed ambient probe
in association with
thermostat EK 186
27
in association with
thermostat EK 187
a
81
switch a up
switch a down
81
The EK 081 can be associated with :

- EK 186 multi-range thermostat
- EK 187 multi-order thermostat
environment :
working temperature : 0 to +80 C
storage temperature : -30 to +100 C
EK 082 adjustable ambient probe

Adjustements
b
27
a
c
81
The potentiometer p allows the thermostat to be adjusted.

- position a
: set position
- position b
: -3 C
- position c
: +3 C
81
The EK 082 can be associated with :

- EK 187 multi-order thermostat
Installation
on a wall
on conduit
2,5 mm
60
60
2,5 mm
seal the
sheath
1
2
T.52
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 165
Voltmeters, ammeters
and current tranformers
Analogue voltmeter and ammeter
Voltmeters range
cat. ref.
scale
reading
- direct reading voltmeter : 300V and 500V for 50/60Hz
- direct reading ammeter : 5A, 15A, 30A
- ammeter with CT : CT/5A
- consumption : voltmeter: 3VA/ammeter : 1.1VA
- isolating voltage : 2kV
SM 005
0-5A
direct
SM 015
0-15A
direct
SM 030
0-30A
direct
SM 050
0-50A
via CT/5A
SM 100
0-100A
via CT/5A
SM 150
0-150A
via CT/5A
SM 250
0-250A
via CT/5A
SM 400
0-400A
via CT/5A
SM 600
0-600A
via CT/5A
Environment
- working T: 23C 10C class = 2
- working T: -10C to +50C class > 2
- storage T: -30C to +75C
Connection capacity
2
- flexible : 1 to 6 mm
2
- rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm
Voltmeters range
cat. ref.
scale
reading
SM 500
direct
0-500V
R
S
T
N
CT*
S
* current transformer
see below
T
N
ammeter
voltmeter
3
L1
0
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
11 9
0
1 3 5 7 9
L1
100
200
L2
2 4 6 8 10
400
L3
SK 603 L2
4 10
50
500
L3
SK 602
300
SM 050
SM 500
2 4
Current transformers (CT)

- primary current: 50 to 600A (depend. on model) secondary current: 5A
- frequency: 50/60Hz
Range of CTs
SR 051: 50/5A
SR 101: 100/5A
SR 151: 150/5A
SR 200: 200/5A
SR 250: 250/5A
SR 300: 300/5A
56
SR 400: 400/5A
SR 600 : 600/5A
77
28
46
84
Technical guide
43
107
29
68
46
64
T.53
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 166
Digital voltmeters, ammeters

Multimeter
- supply voltage : 230 V 50/60 Hz
- resolution : 1 digit
- reading refresh : 3 / second
- impedance input > 1 M for voltmeter SM 501
- insulation resistance : 10 M
- maximum applicable voltage : 660 V
- number of digits : 3 for SM 020 to SM 601, 3 x 4 for SM 001.
Connection
2
- flexible : 6 mm
- rigid : 10 mm
Environment
- operating temperature
- storage temperature
: -10 to +55 C
: -40 to +70 C.
Frequenc Insulation
voltage
y
Hz
reference description
range
conacurracy
sumption %
reference accuracy vari- acceptable acceptble

permanent overload
tempera- ation / C
overload
ture / c
SM 501
voltmeter
500 V
4,5 VA 1
23 1C 0,03% / C 1,2 Un
2 Un/5 sec. 45 - 65
2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
SM 020
direct reading
ammeter
0 - 20 A
1 VA
1
23 1C 0,03% / C 1,2 In
10 In/5 sec. 45 - 65
2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
SM 151
SM 401
ammeter for
current
transformer
0 - 150 A
0 - 400 A
1 VA
1
23 1C 0,03% / C 2 In
10 In/5 sec. 45 - 65
2 kV/50 Hz-1 min
0 - 600 A
SM 601
SM 001
multimeter
35 to 480 V < 0,5 VA 0,5% 1 digit

5 to 8000 A 0,5 VA 0,5% 1 digit
40 to 80 Hz
2 Hz
1,2 In
5 In/1 sec.
40 - 80
Electric connections with switches SK602 and SK603

R
R
S
T
N
S
T
voltmeter
N
1 3 5 7 9
0
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
ammeter
L1
L2
L3
SK 602
2 4 6 8 10
SM 501
2 4
12 14
1 3 5 7 9
0
L1
SK 603
L3
L2
SM 151/SM 401
2 4 6 8 10
2 4
12 14
power supply
230 V
Schematic diagrams
for SM 020 (direct measurement ammeter)
for SM 001 (multimeter)

L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
do not connect
T.I. to the ground
SM 020
2 4
0/20A
1
230 V
circuit to be
measured
9 11 13
entre courant
12 14
power supply
entre tension
N
L1
L2
L3
8 10 12 14
400 V supply
230 V supply
0
230 or 400 V auxiliary supply
for SM 501 (voltmeter)
for SM 151, SM 401, SM 601 (CT measurement ammeter)
SM 501
2 4
circuit to be
measured 0/500 V
SM 151/SM 401
12 14
230 V
power supply
T.54
2 4
circuit to be
measured
12 14
230 V
power supply
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 167
kWh meters
EC110 EC111 EC112

class 2
direct
32A
10A
0.32A
single phase
230V AC (20%)
Single phase
CT operated
EC120 EC121
class 2
CT 100/5A
6A
5A
0.06A
single phase
230V AC (20%)
50/60Hz
IP20
IK02
50/60Hz (2Hz)
IP30 (under cover)
IK02
50/60Hz (2Hz)
IP30 (under cover)
IK02
3
total
without
reset
99 999,9
3
total
total
without + partial with reset
reset
999 999,9
digital
0.1kWh
NO
100 Wh
NO
15 ms+/-3 ms
NO
100 Vdc max
NO
0.3 Adc max
2kV
single single double
-5C to +45C
-20C to +70C
85%
3
total
+ partial with reset
Three phase
Direct reading
EC310
EC311
class 2
direct
80A
30A
0.8A
three phases
230 - 400V AC
(20%)
50/60Hz (2Hz)
IP30 (under cover)
IK01
3 phases + N
3 phases
2 phases (L1&L2)
7
total
+ partial with reset
Network
Width in 17.5
Counter
Display
Unit display
Pulsed output
Pulse duration
External supply
Operating current
Insulate level
Tariff
Working temp.
Storage temp.
Humidity
(without condensation)
Consumption
Connection
Capacity
Connection diagram
EC050, E051
0.1kWh
NO
100Wh
NO
900ms
NO
100Vdc
NO
0.3Adc
-10C to+45C
-25C to+70C
999 999,9
digital
0.1kWh
100 Wh100Wh
60 ms+/-3 ms
100 Vdc max
0.3 Adc max
2kV
single double
-5C to +45C
-20C to +70C
85%
0,3W 6,7VA
2W, 15VA
2
flexible :
flexible : 1 to 6 mm
2
2
1 to 6 mm
rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm
rigid :
2
1.5 to 10 mm
1 3
kWh
EC 051
Single phase wiring diagram

EC 110, EC 111, EC 112 and EC 113
999 999,9
digital
0.1kWh
60ms+/-3ms
100Vdc max
0.3Adc max
2kV
single
double
-5C to +45C
-20C to +70C
85%
T.I. 100 / 5 A
100A
+
1
1
S1
K
S2
EC 121
kWh
Ph
N
tot
part
kWh
res
tot
32 A 230 V
100 Wh
8 10
230 V
tarif 2
(EC 112
only)
single
EC 120 and EC 121
Ph
Ph
N
EC 112
Ph
N
110-230V AC
15%
2W, 15VA
2W, 3VA
2
flexible : 1 to 6 mm Tariff input and pulsed output :
2
2
rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm -flexible : 1 to 6 mm
2
-rigid : 1.5 to 6 mm
Power cables :
2
2
stripped cable : 4mm min, 50mm max
2
2
unstripped cable : 10mm min, 25mm max
N
Ph
EC 051
uniquement
EC312
Technical guide
Single phase
Direct reading
References
EC050 EC051
Accuracy acc. IEC1036 class 1
Imput
direct
Imax
32A
Ib
10A
Istarting
0,02A
Voltage
single phase
230VAC20%
(EC 111, EC 112

and EC113 only)
part
5 A 230 V
t1
t2
res
tarif 1/2 100 Wh
8 10
230 V
tarif 2
(EC 121 only)
T.55
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 168
kWh meters
Imax
Ib
Istarting
Voltage
Network
Width in I 17.5mm
Counter
Display
Unit display
Pulsed output
Pulse duration
External supply
Operating current
Insulate level
Current input
Consumption
Tariff
Working temp.
Storage temp.
Humidity
(without condensation)
Consumption
Connection
capacity
Electrical connection (EC310, EC311, EC312)

There are 2 solutions to connect the three phases and the
neutral to the kWh meter :
1. Pass the cables through the kWh meter, without cutting
and stripping them.
- position the terminal covers by turning through 180
- pass the cables through the kWh meter
- tighten the upper and the bottom terminals to clamp the
cable in position
- tighten at the maximum the piercing screw to allow the
voltage measurement.
- the cables must have a cross section of
- 10 minimum
- 25 max. this means an external diameter of
10,5 mm maximum.
1. terminals to clamp the cable in position
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
2. piercing screws
t1/t2
<1VA for phase to Imax

single
double
single
-5C to +45C
-20C to +70C
85%
2W, 3VA
2
flexible : 1 to 6 mm
2
rigid : 1.5 to 10 mm
Technical specificities
- direct reading with a minimum of handling
- measuring calibration according to the CT is made by
display on the LCD screen (protected access)
- use of only one CT in balanced three phase network
- connection of the CT independent from his polarity
- indifferent to voltage fluctuation up to 20%
1. terminals to
clamp the cable
in position
t1 = 0V ac
t2 = 230V ac
100 Wh
2. It is also possible to connect stripped cables.

- connect your incoming and outgoing cables cut and
stripped.
- position the terminals covers by turning through 180
- make all necessary connections
- the cables must have a cross section of
- 4 minimum
- 50 max. this means a diameter of 10,5 mm
maximum (bared).
1. terminals to tighten to clamp the
bare cable in position
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
Installation recommendations
- it is recommended to foresee a space of 0.5 on each side
of a meter with direct connection
- EC 320 and EC 321 can directly replace the previous
products (EC 030 and EC 031)
Recommendations to connect the secondary circuit of one or
more CTs
- no common point for connection on the meter
- never connect to earth
t1/t2
t1 = 0V ac
t2 = 230V ac
T.56
Not necessary to tighten these terminals
References
Accuracy acc.IEC1036
Imput
Three phase
CT operated
EC 320
EC 321
class 2
CT 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400,
600, 800, 1 000, 1 250 and 1 500/5A
6A
5A
0.06A
three phases
230 - 400V AC
(20%)
50/60Hz (2Hz)
IP30 (under cover)
IK02
3 phases + N with 3CT or 1CT
3 phases with 3CT
2 phases (L1&L2) with 2CT
4
total + partial with reset
999 999,9
digital
0.1kWh
100 Wh
60ms+/-3ms
100 Vdc max
0.3 Adc max
2kV
1. terminals to tighten to
clamp the bare cable
in position
100 Wh
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 169
kWh meters
Metering with balanced three phase voltage 230/400V~ with
neutral
EC 320
EC 321
L1
L1
L2
L3
N
L2
L3
N
1 3
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
1 3
EC 320
2 4 6 8
Metering with three phase unbalanced voltage 230/400V ~ with neutral

EC 320 EC 321
1 3 5 7 9 11
EC 320
1 3 5 7 9 11
EC 321
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
EC 321
12 14
L2
L1 L3
L2
L1 L3
100 Wh
12 14
L2
L1 L3
100 Wh
L2
L1 L3
100 Wh
t1 = 0 V ac
t2 = 230 V ac
100 Wh
t1 = 0 V ac
t2 = 230 V ac
Notice : these meters are not suitable for a three phase

voltage 110/230V~ (with or without neutral)
In this case use the EC 322
Metering with three phase voltage 230/400V~ associated with an
ammeter and his phase selector.
Metering with two phase voltage 400 V

EC 320
EC 321
L2
L1
The 230V~ incomer for double tariff

metering cannot work when neutral
not connected.
L3
L2
L3
N
1 3 5 7
EC 320
4 6 8
1 3 5 7 9 11
EC 32X
12 14
1 3 5 7 9
L2
SM ...
SK 603 0
L1
L3
50
L3
100 Wh
L2
L2
L1 L3
2 4 6 8 10
2 4
Metering with three phase unbalanced voltage 400V~ without neutral

EC 320
EC 321
L1
The 230V~ incomer for double tariff

metering cannot work when neutral
not connected
L2
L3
1 3 5 7 9 11
EC 320
4 6 8
Technical guide
2 4 6 8
12 14
L2
L1 L3
100 Wh
T.57
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 170
Technical data
Twilight switches
Width in I 17.5mm
voltage supply
frequency
consumption
output
Maximum switching capacity
AC1
incandescent lamps
230V halogen lamps
fluorescent lamps,
non compensated
fluorescent lamps, compensated
fluorescent lamps compensated
in series
duo fluorescent lamps
lighting level : 2 ranges
ON and OFF delay
mounting of cell
programmable
technology
cycle
programming setting
accuracy
operating reserve
Environment
working temperature
storage temperature
Connection
maximum length between
cell and modular
capacity (modular device)
capacity (cell)
Note :
EE 100
3
EE 101
3
EE 110
5
EE 170
3
EE 171
3
230V +10/-15%
50Hz
1.5VA maximum
1 voltage free changeover contacts
230V 10%
50/60Hz
1VA
1NO
16A / 250V
2000W
1000W
10A
2300W
1000W
200W
2300W
1000W
1000W
5 to 100 lux and 50 to 2000 lux
15 to 60 seconds
surface
flush *
surface
surface
no
no
yes
yes
electromechan. digital
24 hours
7 days**
15 min.
1 min.
+/- 6min/year +/-6min/year
accu
lithium battery
200h after
total of 3 years
beeing
of supply failure
connected for
120h
2 to 1000 lux
ON 10s OFF 40s
surface
yes
-30C to +60C (cell) -10C to +50C (modular device)

-20C to +60c
50 meters
2
0.5 to 4 mm
2
0.75 to 4 mm
-25C to +45C
2,5 mm max
2
0.75 to 4 mm
EE 002
flush mounting
89x48x32
2
cable 1m 2 x 0.75 mm
IP54
-30C to +60C
EE 003
surface mounting
25x25x20 hole 25mm
2
0.75 to 4 mm
IP54
-30C to +60C
Wiring diagram
EE 100 - EE 101 - EE 171
EE 110
EE 700
Ph
N
Ph
N
Ph
N
7 8 9 10 11 12
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
EE 700
EE 100
1 2 3 4 5 6
T.58
no
7 days
1 min
+/-6min/year
lithium battery
total of 3 years
of supply failure
* delivered with a 1m cable (2x0.75)

** 8 predefined programs
Cells
Type
Dimension (mm)
Connection
Protection class
Working and storage temperat.
EE 700
-
N N L L
EE 110
1
2 3 4
5 6
7 8 9 10
PE
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 171
Dimmers
Remote control dimmers, 300W EV 011 and EV 012
EV 011
Remote control dimmer, 600W EV 002

Fault display
- ON: excess temperature
1 3 5
N L
- flashing : overload or
EV002
short-circuit
2
1
Supply voltage display, 230 V
- ON: OK 230 Volts present
- flashing: no load
3
Dimming button ON/OFF
L
2
1
N
3
L
EV004
3
2
Fault display
- ON: excess temperatur
- flashing: overload or
short-circuit
Supply voltage display 230 V
- ON: OK 230 V
- flashing: no load
Button for :
- dimming control
- brightness level - preferred
scene recall
- setting the maximum/minimum
dimming range limits
Brightness level display
Remote control dimmer 1000W EV102

1
E1
E2
EV 100
242103
local
min.
max.
230 V~
RLC
IN
1/10V
Remote control unit EV106
local
slave
100 W 15
C
slave
master
EV 102
242102 9
EV 106
242106
230 V ~
1/10 V 50mA
01...99
01...99
RLC
ok
ok
IN/OUT 1/110V 5AACT250V~
OUT
1/10V
10
DEVG
10
Remote control unit EV108

1
11
15
E1
E2
14
16
Dimensional drawing, remote-control dimmers EV011 und EV012

18
47
EV 108
242108 9
EV011
1/10 V 50mA
45
85
01...99
ok
OUT
1/10V
DEVG
10
14
16
58
88
Dimensional drawing, remote-control dimmers EV002, EV106

and EV108
44
71
44
Technical guide
Dimensional drawing, remote-control dimmers EV100 and and

EV012
EV002
85
45
58
85
45
58
T.59
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 172
Dimmers
Dimming mode
ON/OFF
Short press (functions like remote-switch). Switches on at the most recently set dimming level.
BRIGHTER/DARKER Long press. Pressing this button and holding it down moves the brightness steadily down to the minimum or up to
the maximum setting. Each time the button is released and then held pressed down again the dimming direction is
reversed.
Functions
Supply voltage display
EV011
Low audible noise

Excess temperature
protection
EV012
EV002
X
EV004
X
EV100
X
EV102
X
Excess temperature display
Short-circuit protection
Memory function
Soft-start function
Relay output
Individual mode
System mode - master (OUT 1-10V)

X
EV108
System mode slave (IN 1-10V)
EV106
Preferred scene inputs
Preferred scene control
Automatic level control
Red LED lights up

so long as main voltage is present.
Particularly low audible noise during
dimming
Integrated electronic protective circuit
against overheating - the power output
and thus the brightness is automatically
reduced
Red LED lights up
as soon as the excess temperature
protection circuit is triggered.
Integrated electronic protective circuit self-resetting - in the event of a load
short-circuit this disables the output for
the duration of the fault.
If the device is switched off or in the event
of a power failure, the most recent
dimming setting is not lost; it is saved.
As soon as the device is switched on
again, it resumes at the dimming value
thus stored.
When the device is switched on it dimps
up automatically; this prolongs the useful
life of the lamps connected.
This is used for the status display or to
switch the load (electronic ballast unit)
output voltage
=0V= contact open
>0V= contact closed
The dimming value of each individual
remote-control dimmer is set via the
connected pushbuttons or via the
dimming button on the device itself.
Control device for driving several dimmers or
electronic ballast units
Brightness level is set via the 1-10 volts
interface.
One input on EV004; two inputs on EV102
and EV108
This activates a preferred brightness level
(e.g. by pushbutton). So long as the
preferred scene input is closed normal
dimming cannot be performed. After the preferred scene
input opens, the brightness level thus activated is
retained.
This activates a set brightness level (e.g. by switch). so
long as the input is closed, normal dimming cannot be
performed.
After the input opens, the most recent brightness level is
activated.
The dimming buttons can be fitted with their own glow
lamps (5mA).
Quiescent current
Settings
Dimming on the device itself
Mode selection switch
EV011
EV012
EV002
X
EV004
X
EV100
X
X
EV102
X
X
EV106
X
EV108
X
Soft-dim-up
Soft-dim-down
Dimming speed for preferred scene recall
Mode selection - automatic level control

or preferred scene recall
Brightness levels for automatic level control
and preferred secen recall
Button on the device for controlling the brightness

EV100
individual mode or
system mode - slave
EV102
individual mode or
system mode - slave or
system mode - master
the maximum / minimum dimming limits can be set via
potentiometer
the maximum / minimum dimming limits can be set via
the display
The time can be set that the dimmer needs to dim up
from 0 percent to 100 percent.
When the dimmer is switched on, the most recent
brightness level is reactivated (memory function). The
soft-dim-up duration can be set from 0 percent up to
100 percent.
The soft-dim-down duration can be set from 100 percent
down to 10 percent
The diming duration and speed can be set from 0 per
cent up to 100 percent.
This selection can be made sepratately for each input
Values from 0 percent up to 99 percent can be set.
Dimming range limits

- adjustment potentiometer
- display
Dimming speed
T.60
X
X
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 173
Dimmers
Select the right dimmer type and control device from the lists
below.
Which type of lamp do you want to dim ?

What is the power output you want to dim ?
Do you wish to have a preferred scene recall installed ?
Selection table for remote-control dimmers
Lampe type
individual mode
0W
Incandescent lamps and

high-voltage halogen lamps
20 W
60 W 100 W 300 W
System mode
600 W 1000 W
30 x 1 kW
EV011, EV012
EV004, EV004
EV100, EV102
Low-voltage halogen lamps

with conventional
transformer *
EV102 + x EV100 or EV102
EV011
EV002, EV004
EV102 + x EV100 or EV102
EV100, EV004
with electronic transformer
dimmable from
primary side *
EV012
EV002, EV004
230 V
EV102 + x EV100 or EV102
EV100, oder EV102
12 V
when using electronic transformers it is important to observe the

manufacturers instructions.
Selection table for control devices

Lamp type
Number of ballast units to be controlled

with 1-10 volt interface
EV106 / EV108
The number of ballast units is restricted.
The maximum possible number can be calculated from
- the connection data of the ballastr unit types being used and
- the current sink or power rating of the control device.
230 V
12 V
Fluorescent lamps
with electronic ballast unit with
with 1-10 volt interface
EVG
For example : type of ballasr unit used, e.g. for LL 2 x 36 W:System rating
main current
control current 1-10 V
current sink
power rating/current
Number = current sink = 50 mA = 50
control current
1mA
71 W
0,31 A
1 mA
50 mA max.
2.300 W /
16 A AC1
This 50 ballast units of the specified type can be controlled

if however, the ballast units have to be switched to zero voltage for OFF (in this context please refer
to the manufacturers instructions), then the total power output and the mains current drawn must
also be taken into account.
number = power current or
mains current
power rating = 2300 W = 32

systems rating
71 W
The maximum number of ballast units can be controlled is the smaller of the two values thus
calculated, i.e. in this case = 32.
use in the system mode

remote-control unit EV106 or EV108 in conjunction with remote-control dimmer EV100 / EV102
for example: Total output power of all lamps to be dimmed : 8,6 kW
devices required :
1 x EV106 and 9 x EV100 = 9 kW
or 9 x EV102 = 9 kW
or 1 x EV102 + 8 x EV100
Technical guide
Expansions
T.61
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 174
Dimmers
Technical data
Remote control dimmers
Dimensions
Reference voltage
Power dissipation
at rated load
Dimming principle
Load type
Incandescent lamps
230-volt halogen lamps
low-voltage halogen lamps
with conventional transformer
low-voltage halogen lamps
dimmable primary side
Display for parameters
and brightness
Relay output / status
signalling
System interface (safety

extra-low voltage, SELV)
Slave (IN 1-10 V active,
current source)
Master (OUT 1-10V, passive
current sink)
Remote control of
pushbuttons
Illuminated dimming buttons
Dimming and ON / OFF on
the device itself
Inputs for brightness

levell recall
Automatic level
control/preferred
scene recall
Soft-dim-up speed
(for automatic level
control and preferred
scene recall)
brightness level
(for automatic level
control and preferred
scene recall)
Dimming speed normal
soft-dim-up duration
(0-100%)
soft-dim- down duration
(0-100%)
T.62
EV011
EV012
1 slot
1 slot
230 VAC
(+10% / -15%), 50Hz
6 watts
6 watts
EV002
4 slots
EV004
4 slots
EV100
5 slots
EV102
5 slots
6 watts
6 watts
15 watts
15 watts
leading-edge
phase cut
automatic load detection

(leading-edge phase cut or trailing-edge phase cut)
trailing-edge
phase cut
20-300W at 35C
20-300W at 35C
20-300W at 35C
no
20-600W at 45C
20-600W at 45C
20-600W at 45C
20-300W at 35C
20-600W at 45C
no
no
yes
0-99%
20-1000W
20-1000W
no
no
yes
0-99%
yes
1 normally-open
contact, 5A
AC1 230V
DC1 12V
min 100mA
no
yes
(dimmable via potentiometer
100 kohm, 200mW logarithmic
or 10V out device)
no
no
yes
(1-10V interface
also available to
dimming output;
max. 50mA or
30 EV100 or
EV102)
1 button
short press to
switch
long press to
dim
3 buttons
1 button to dim
up,
1 button to dim
down,
1 button to
switch
no
2x230VAC
yes
yes
quiescent current up to 5mA
no
no
1 button
short press to
switch
long press to
dim
no
no
no
no
no
no
not available
fixed 4s
2 buttons
1 button to dim
up,
1 button to dim
down,
short press on
both buttons
together to switch
1x230VAC
1 preferred scene, no
brightness
settable on device
0-99%
activation
by switch
--> automatic level
by pushbutton
--> preferred scene
fixed 0-100%
not available
activation by
pushbutton = 0s
by switch = 4s
3 automatic
levels or
2 preferred
scenes setttable
on device,
brightness
settable on
device
0-99%
settable
0-100%
1s-99m59s
0-99%
0-99%
settable 4s-99s
settable 0s-99s
settable
0s-99s
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 175
Dimmers
Safety instructions for dimmers EV001, EV012, EV002, EV004,
EV100, EV102:
These dimmers are not suitable for dimming electronic ballast
units.
When using with a conventional transformer there may be
transformer losses of approx. 20 percent.
The transformer used should not be operated at less than 75
percent of its rated capacity.
When using with an electronic transformer there may be
transformer losses of approx. 5 percent.
it is also important to observe the advisory notes and
instructions issued by the lamp manufacturers.
the correct operating temperature must be ensured. A dimmer
should be installed in the lower area of the distributor.
Reference
EV106
Dimensions
4 PLE
reference voltage
230 V AC (+10% /-15%), 50 HZ
Power dissipation
3W
System interface
Master (OUT 1 - 10 V: passive,

current sink, max. 50 mA or
30 EV100 or EV102
EV108
Display for parameters and

brightness
yes 0 - 99 %
relay output/
status signalling
yes
1 normally open contact 10 A
dimming value at output
0 % -> open contact
>0% -> close contact
remote control of pushbutton yes

illuminated pushbuttons
yes quiescent current up to 5 mA
Dimming and ON/OFF

on the device itself
3
1
1
1
buttons
button to dim-up-;
button to dim down
button to switch
Automatic level control /

preferred scene recall
no
3 automatic
levels or 2
preferred scenes
settable on the
device
Brightness
settable on the
device 0-99%
Technical date
Remote contro ldimmers
Reference
EV106
yes
with Display
min. 1 - 49 %
max. 51 - 99 %
Dimming speed
(normal dimming)
EV108
Settable
0 - 100 %
4 s - 99 s
Activation of automatic level / not available

preferred scene
230 Volts inputs
Soft-dim-up and soft-dim

down
Settable
0 - 100 %
1s - 99s
Memory function
yes
yes
Sof start
yes
yes
Connection
flexible
rigid
cage terminals
1 - 6 mm2
1,5 - 10 mm2
line length
pushbutton inputs
control interface
max. 50 m
max. 50 m
ambient temperature
storage
operation
-20C to +60C
-10C to +45C
Technical guide
Technical data
Control device
T.63
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 176
Dimmers
Remote control dimmers EV011 and EV012
Remote control dimmers EV002 and EV004

L1
N
L1
N
EV011
242011
EV 002
242002
E1
E2
230 V~
01...99
230 V~
300 W 35C
Remote control dimmer EV100
Remote control dimmer EV102

L3
L2
L1
N
L2
L1
N
5
1
EV 100
242103
E1
E2
local
min.
max.
230 V~
slave
EV 102
242102
master
local
slave
100 W 15C
230 V~
01...99
RLC
RLC
ok
IN
IN/
OUT 1/110V
1/10V
5AACT
250V~
10
Remote control units EV106/EV108

*1 Operating switch : local
L3
L2
L1
N
N
EV 108
242108
11
15
E1
E2
*2 Setting the preferred scene recall (usually via pushbutton)

As soon as the contact closes the preset brightness level is
set.
So long as the contact remains closed, the brightness cannot
be changed.
As soon as the contact opens again the brightness can be
changed.
1/10 V 50mA
01...99
ok
OUT 1/10V
10
DEVG
14
16
N
L
EVG
+ ETR
T.64
Setting the automatic level (usually via switch or relay contact)

set.
be changed.
As soon as the contact opens again the brightness last set
before automatic control is automatically activated.
*3 Switch contact for status display (e.g. in a panel)
dimming output :
0%: -> contact open
>0%: -> contact closed
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 177
Dimmers
Remote-control dimmers EV100/EV102 in system mode
L3
L2
L1
N
EV 102
242102
E1
E2
master
local
slave
100 W 15C
EV 102
242102
230 V~
E1
E2
master
local
slave
100 W 15C
01...99
230 V~
local
min.
max.
230 V~
slave
01...99
RLC
RLC
RLC
ok
ok
EV 100
242103
IN
10
10
1/10V
1-10V
*1 Mode slection switch in master position (1-10V out, current

sink)
*4 in slave mode only the automatic level function is available

for E1 and E2.
*2 Mode selection switch in slave position (1-10V in, current

source)
note:
it is possible, by switching the operating mode from slave to
local, to remove a dimmer from system mode for a certain period.
*3 Inputs E1 and E2 are, depending on settings, assigned different functions :

setting the preferred scene recall (usually via pushbutton)
set
be changed.
As soon as the contact opens again the brightness can be
changed
40 %
20 %
0
Setting the automatic level (usually via switch or relay contact)

set.
be changed
As soon as the contact opens again the brightness last set
before automatic control is automatically activated.
preferred scene
recall E1
automatic level
control E2
dimming button
1
0
remote control units EV106 / EV108 in the system
The sequence involved in automatic level control / preferred

scene recall
L3
L2
L1
N
EV 108
242108
11
15
E1
E2
EV 102
242102
1/10 V 50mA
E1
E2
master
local
slave
100 W 15C
01...99
230 V~
EV 102
242102
local
slave
230 V~
01...99
RLC
RLC
ok
1/10V
10
E2
master
9
100 W 15C
01...99
OUT
E1
Technical guide
ok
ok

DEVG
EVG
14
16
10
10
N
L
ETR +
1-10V
T.65
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 178
Two-channels twilight switches

Power supply
EE 200
230 V AC +10/-15% 50 Hz
EE 202
Consumption
2,4 W max.
Outputs
max. cut-off power
incandescent lamps
230 V halogen
TBT halogen, ferromagnetic transformer
TBT halogen, electronic transformer
series connection fluo tubes
parallel compensated fluo tubes
fluocompact with electronic ballast
fluocompact with traditional ballast
2 contacts NO
16 A 250 V AC1
2300 W
2300 W
1500 VA
2300 W
3600 W
1000 W 112 capacity
450 W
2300 W
State signalling LED
one red LED per channel
Brightness and override range
2 to 200 lux or 200 to 20 000 lux : adjustable by channel

on or Off override by channel
Switching and release time delay
30s
Auto/test switch
auto = normal operation

test = test of brightness threshold, the 30 sec. - time delay is not active in this mode
Selector of auto/semi-auto mode with time

delay
no
yes, automatic or semi-automatic mode
Time delay or semi-automatic mode
adjustable from 1 min to 2hr
Cascade mounting
slave product can be chained only with a

EE 202
master or slave, max. chaining of 10 products
Connection
max distance of inputs IN 1 or IN 2
flexible
50 m, input signal voltge of or 230 V

link by means of two non-polarised conductors of 1 to 6 mm2 with a maximum of 50 m
cage terminal 1 to 6 mm2
rigid
cage terminal 1.5 to 10 mm2
max. distance of chaining
Environment
0C to +45C
Storage temperature
-20C to +60C
Functions of EE 202
Semi-automatic (mode 2) :
in this mode, E1 input is used to define authorization periods
(230V presence on input IN1).
A push-button connected to E2 input makes it possible to switch
lighting on/off.
Outside authorization periods, the switch-on duration is delayed. The
time period of such a timer is set via a potentiometer.
Within the authorization period, switch-on can be carried out by
pressing the push-button.
Then, the control of the area depends on brightness threshold
associated with each output.
Automatic mode :
(potentiometer 5 in mode 1 position)
In this mode, the twilight switch controls outputs if the brightness is
too low and provided E1 input is activated (230V presence).
An override push-button connected to IN2 input makes it possible to
reverse the state of lighting areas.
Lighting is switched off automatically as soon as E1 is deactivated
(0V)
Electrical diagrams
EE 200
EE 202
Ph
N
Ph
N
Ph
N
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
auto
test
auto
test
mode 2
mode 2
mode 1
mode 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
E1
Ph
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
auto
test
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
auto
test
mode 2
mode 1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
E2
Ph
EE 202
* the chaining link is used to transmit brightness dat to several products in order to increase
the number of controlled thresholds and circuits.
T.66
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 179
Telephone remote control

- power supply : 230 V AC 15% 50/60 Hz
- consumption : < 2 W
- analog telephone line : 48V DC
- output relays : 250 V/5 A AC1
- technical alarm inputs :
1 input 0-30 V AC/DC, 5 mA mini
switching threshold : 7V, +/- 1V
1 input 0-230 V AC, 5 mA mini
- switching threshold : 100 V, +/-40%
- temperature input : CTN 10 kOhm
- battery reserve : 4 hours
- charging time : 72 hours
voice assistance
user recorded messages
heating
shifting form
programming
mode to
frost free mode
alarm input
n1 - n2
temperature probe
and alarm
inputs
lighting
switch
ON/OFF
intrusion
simulation...
roller
shutters
Up/Down
analogue
telephone
line (PSTN) input
Size
- 5 modules
Environment
- working temperature : 0 C to +50 C
- storage temperature : -20 C +70 C
- class of insulation : II
- protection index : IP 30 IK 03
230VAC power
supply and
network failure
detection
Connection
- capacity : flexible / rigid conductor 1 x 0,75 mm2 mini
- 2 x 2,5 mm2 maxi
- screw : PZ1
...
1
Power
Phone
On/off
On/off
On/off
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
Reset
1
2
3
4
Tel. *
24V
AC/DC
Franais
Deutsch
Italiano
Standards
- European Telecom Approval : TS103 021
Ph
N
Filtre
ADSL
Modem
ADSL
(optionnel)
Other controls, spraying, pump...
5
6
Telephone jack indicator

Power indicator : product power supply
ON/OFF key : local control of output relay override
Relay status indicator
- indicator ON = relay ON
- indicator OFF = relay OFF
Language selection cursor
RESET key : reseting to factory setup+power indicator flickering
Menu parameters
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L N
IN 1
IN 2
- connect the remote control to the telephone network line

- dial your telephone number from an external dialing set
- follow voice assistance instructions to access Menu Parameters
TH 020A /B /C
Out 2
Out 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10
sonde de
temprature
CTN 10 k
(optionnelle) **
This mode allows :

- to set voice assistance sound volume
- to personalize your access code
- to record your own voice messages
(the maximum time of each messages is 10 seconds),
- to program time delay circuit operation
- to define the number of rings before activation
(factory setting is 5 seconds)
- to configure technical alarms
Technical guide
Out1
* Lightning protector of telephone line inputs is recommended.

** Recommended termperature probe : EK 081,
EK 083, EK 086.
Inputs : IN 1 : 0-30 V AC / DC - 5 mA min.
IN 2 : 0-230 V AC - 5 mA min.
Use BT/TBT interface relay
Outputs : OUT 1, 2, 3 : relays 5 A, AC1
Please provide separate tracking for power supply cables
and temperature sensor cable.
T.67
2/25/09
2:02 PM
Page 180

General Catalogue 2009-2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

General Catalogue 2009-2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1/7/09

Hager Electro Systems Pte Ltd

Hager Engineering (M) Sdn. Bhd

General catalogue 2009 - 2010

2009 SEA COVER.qxd

Welcome to the new edition of our general catalogue

The Hager Group

Making an important contribution

The expansion of the Hager

Our ambition is to offer the

Established more than 50 years

Today the Hager Group manufactures at 30 locations in 12

Our quality standard is

Symbols used in this

Symbols used in this

Symbols used in this

Symbols used in this

Mini Gamma enclosures

Cosmos and Icos enclosures

Vector enclosures - IP55

Volta flush enclosures

Orion Plus metal IP65 enclosures

IP65 Orion Plus metal enclosures

Orion Plus GRP IP65 enclosures

A.12-14 Accessories for Orion Plus enclosures

Mini Gamma enclosures

For technical information

For plain or transparent door

N - terminal 4 connections 2x16 + 2x10

N - terminal 7 connections 3x16 + 4x10

PE- terminal 4 connections 2x16 + 2x10

PE- terminal 7 connections 3x16 + 4x10

Terminal support for GD 104

Terminal support for GD 106

Terminal support for GD 108

Terminal support for GD 110

Cosmos and Icos enclosures

Cosmos flush mounting

For technical information

Icos IP40 surface mounting

For technical information

IU metal enclosure IP41

With rectangular knock-out

For technical information

To blank out a complete row

Supplied with 1 key

Surface mounting enclosures

With premarked knock outs for

For technical information,

Vector enclosures - IP55

E : 4x16 + 4x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

E : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

N : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

E : 4x16 + 4x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

E : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

N : 8x16 + 9x10 + 6x16 + 8x10

Golf enclosure 12, 24, 36I

These enclosures are delivered

For technical information

E : 2x(1x25 + 5x16 + 5x10)

With transparent door

With plain door

With transparent door